Skip to main content

Full text of "Aural culture based upon musical appreciation"

See other formats


*M''     V*       .ficrf!      A.  \J       J,    fLlL-.i 


MT 

35 

W333 

1914 

Pt.  1 

c.  1 

MUSI 


Presented  to  the 

LIBRARY  of  the 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 

from  the 

ARTHUR  PLETTNER 

ISA  McILWRATTH 

COLLECTION 


THE    JOSEPH    WILLIAMS     SERIES    OF    HANDBOOKS    ON    MUSIC    UNDER    THE    EDITORSHIP 

OP  STEWART  MACPHBRSON. 


n 

AURAL  CULTURE 

BASED   UPON 

MUSICAL     APPRECIATION 


BY  (-\ 

STEWART   MACPHERSON 

AND 

ERNEST    READ 

(With  an  Appendix  to  Part  I,  "  The  Realization  and  Expression  of  Music  through 

movement,"  by  MARIE  SALT) 


IN    THREE    PARTS: 

PART     I.— PRICE  51-  NET  CASH. 
„        II,         „        71- 
„      HI.          „        71- 

Pupils'  Books  of  Songs  and  Exercises  from  the  same,  including  Sight-Singing  Studies,  etc. 
To  Part      I. — Price  One  Shilling  net  cash. 

Part    II. — Price  One  Shilling  and  Sixpence  net  cash. 
Part  III. — Price  Two  Shillings  net  cash. 


LONDON  :  JOSEPH  WILLIAMS,  LIMITED,  32  GREAT  PORTLAND  S.TREET,  W.I. 

AGENTS  FOB  AMERICA 
THE  B.  P.  WOOD  MUSIC  CO..  85  ST.  STEPHEN  STBEET,  BOSTON.  U.S.A. 


8149  [MADE  AND   PRINTED  IN   GREAT   BRITAIN! 


NOTE  TO  NEW  AND   REVISED  EDITION. 


THE  call  for  a  new  edition  of  the  present  volume  has  enabled 
the  Authors  to  make  some  slight  alterations  and  additions 
in  the  course  of  the  text,  and  also  to  modify  in  some  instances 
the  Pianoforte  accompaniments  to  the  Rhythmic  Exercises  and 
Nursery -Rhyme  Tunes,  in  the  direction  of  greater  ease  of 
execution. 

LONDON,  1914. 


SINCE  the  appearance  in  1910  of  "Music  and  its  Appreciation"  and 
"  The  Appreciative  Aspect  of  Music-study,"  I  have  been  repeatedly 
asked  to  write  something  in  the  nature  of  a  class-book,  or  teacher's 
guide,  for  those  desirous  of  systematically  training  their  pupils  in 
the  aural  perception  of  music.  Certain  ideas  had  begun  to  shape 
themselves  in  my  mind  in  this  direction  when  I  discovered  with 
pleasure  that  my  friend  and  former  pupil,  Mr.  Ernest  Read,  A.R.  A.M., 
was  planning  a  series  of  lessons  in  which  the  basic  facts  of  music, 
such  as  Pitch,  Time,  Rhythm  and  Character,  were  revealed  to  the 
pupil  through  the  medium  of  definite  musical  compositions.  This 
design — so  far  as  I  know,  original  in  its  conception — seemed  so 
eminently  in  consonance  with  the  whole  idea  of  Musical  Appreciation 
Study,  that  I  at  once  proposed  to  Mr.  Read  that  we  should  collaborate 
on  the  present  work.  As  a  consequence,  those  portions  of  each 
volume  dealing  more  directly  with  the  question  of  Ear-training  and 
Sight-singing  represent  in  large  measure  the  result  of  his  experience 
in  teaching  classes  both  of  children  and  also  of  those  who  can  no 
longer  be  described  as  belonging  to  that  category.  The  special 
Rhythmic  Exercises  and  Nursery  Rhyme  tunes,  which  I  feel  will 
form  a  very  attractive  feature  of  the  elementary  lessons,  are  the 
composition  of  my  colleague. 

As  stated  in  the  Introductory  Chapter,  Parts  II  and  III  deal 
with  more  advanced  aspects  of  the  matters  contained  in  Part  I,  and 
develop  the  idea  of  Musical  Appreciation  in  its  wider  sense,  in  a  form 
which  it  is  hoped  may  be  useful  to  the  teacher  who  may  be  concerned 
either  with  classes  or  with  individual  pupils.* 

Although  actually  independent  of  the  scheme  of  work  herein  set 
forth  by  my  colleague  and  myself,  the  interesting  and  attractive  Free 
Rhythmic  Movements  for  young  children  described  by  Miss  Marie  Salt 
m  the  Appendix  entitled  "  Music  and  the  Young  Child,"  are,  in  my 
opinion — based  upon  close  personal  observation  for  some  time  past — 
of  the  utmost  value  in  preparing  the  way  for  a  more  formulated 
musical  training  of  ear  and  mind.  It  is  obvious  that  such  movements 
could  with  advantage  precede  or  accompany  the  scheme  of  study  laid 

down  in  Part  I  of  this  book. 

STEWART  MACPHERSON. 
LONDON,  1912. 

*  A  synopsis  of  Parts  II  and  III  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  this  volume. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTORY  CHAPTER 
DIRECTIONS  TO  THE  TEACHER 


EHTTHMIC  EXERCISES  AND  SONGS  (Twelve  Steps) 9 


STEP 

I  (a). 

PULSE  BEGULARITY 

33 

ii 
STEP 

II  (a). 

IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OF  Don  AND  Son 
PULSE  AND  ACCENT  —  DUPLE  TIME 

34 
38 

STEP 

II  (b). 
Ill  (a). 

IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OP  UPPER  Don 
PULSE  AND  ACCENT  —  TRIPLE  TIME 

41 

43 

Ill  (b). 

IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OP  ME  ... 

45 

STEP 

IV  (a). 
IV  (b). 

PULSE  AND  ACCENT  —  QUADRUPLE  TIME  
IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OF  TE  ... 

47 
50 

STEP 

V(a). 

DUPLE  TIME  —  TWO-PULSE  SOUND 

53 

V  (b). 

IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OF  BAY  ... 

56 

STEP 

VI  (a). 
VI  (b). 

TRIPLE  TIME  —  THREE-PULSE  SOUND  —  THE  ONE-LINE  STAFF... 
IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OF  FAH... 

59 

62 

STEP 

VII  (a). 

QUADRUPLE  TIME  —  FOUR-PULSE  SOUND... 

65 

VII  (b). 

IMITATION  AND  MEMORIZATION  OF  LAH... 

67 

STEP 

VIII  (a). 
VIII  (b). 

THE  STAFF  OF  TWO  LINES  —  FURTHER  PRACTICE  IN  DURATION 
THE  SCALE... 

71 
74 

STEP 
it 

IX  (a). 
IX  (b). 

SYNCOPATION  —  THE  STAFF  OF  THREE  LINES  

THE  TONIC,  DOMINANT  AND  SUB-DOMINANT  CHORDS  —  PERFECT 
AND  IMPERFECT  CADENCES   ... 

77 

80 

STEP 
STEP 

STEP 
it 

X(a). 
X(b). 

XI  (a). 
XI  (b). 

XII  (a). 
XII  (b). 

HALF-PULSE  SOUND  —  THE  STAFF  OF  THREE  LINES  (continued) 
EXTENSION  OF  SCALE  —  LOWER  Son,  LAH  AND  TE  

ONE-AND-A-HALF-PULSE  SOUND  —  THE  STAFF  OF  FIVE  LINES  ... 
THE  INTERRUPTED  CADENCE  —  FIRST  STEP  IN  ABSOLUTE  PITCH 

BESTS  —  FIXED  (OR  ABSOLUTE)  PITCH  APPLIED  TO  THE  STAFF 

BESTS  —  THE  POSITION  OF  THE  DOMINANT  AND  SUB-DOMINANT 
CHORDS  ON  THE  STAFF  —  THE  MAJOR  SCALE 

83 
87 

88 
92 

96 
100 

ALTERNATIVE  (EASIER)  SONGS  FOR  PITCH-LESSONS  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  103 


BECREATIVE  Music  TO  BE  PLAYED  TO  THE  PUPIL  WITHOUT  TECHNICAL  COMMENT  112 


APPENDIX — MUSIC  AND  THE  YOUNG  CHILD — THE  BEALIZATION  AND  EXPRESSION 

OF    MUSIC    THROUGH    MOVEMENT,    by    MARIE    SALT          ...  ...  ...  i  to  XV 


ECILIA. 


A  Collection  of  Part  Songs  for  two,  three  and  four  Treble  Voices 


(c)  Signifies  that  the  sol-fa  version  is  printed  irith  the  old  notation. 


SERIES  16  (2  Treble  Voices). 

O.N.  Sol-fa, 

Chimes.     2  v Harry  Farjeon  3d.  (c) 

A  Tudor  Saylor's  Song.     2  v.  ...Harry  Farjeon  3d.  (c) 

As  Happy  as  Kings.     2  v Harry  Farjeon  4d.  (r) 

The  Lamb.    2  v Laurence  Powell  4d.  (c) 

I  Love  Sixpence  (Canon).    2  v Adam  Carse  4d.  (e) 

The  Song  of  the  Minutes.     2v Felix  White  4.1.  (t) 

Windy  Nights.    2v Jessie  Furze  4d.  (c) 

Marching  Song.    2v Jessie  Furze  4d.  (f) 

Lullaby.    2  v Jessie  Furze  4d.  (e) 

Fairy-Land.    2v Cyril  Jenkins  4d.  (c) 

Mary,  Mary.    2v Cyril  Jenkins  4d.  (c) 

Waken,  lords  and  ladles  gay.    "  v. 

Liurence  Powell  4d.  (c) 
There  be  none  of  Beauty's  Daughters.    2  v. 

Allan  Biggs  4.1.  (r) 

Foreign   Craft.    2  v Gerrard  Williams  4d.  (c) 

The  rag  and  bone  man.    2  v Josef  Holbooke  4.1. 

Rllloby-RIU.    2  v Granville  Bantock  6d.  (c) 

Endymlon.     2  v C.  31.   Edmunds  4d.  (c) 


SERIES  23  (2,3&4  Treble  Voices). 


1  From  Asia,  from  the  dayspring     ,,.     rh_r_,  \ 

that  uprises.    3  v songs  ami 

2  Where  Is  the  home  for  me  ?          Dances 

0  Cyprus  I    3v from  "  The 

3  Will  they  ever  come  to  me,  ever    Bacchae"of 

again?    3v I    Euripides, 

4  Weave  ye  the  dance.    3v GRAN£ILLE 

5  There     be     many     shapes     of      R  Awrnrt 

mystery.    3  v V        "'"m  ;  4j 

0    Night  hymn  at  sea.       2v A.  Goring  Thomas  4d. 

7  A  Spring  day  (Canon).    2  v A.  E.  Horrocks  4d. 

8  Maidens  blithe.    2v H.  Purcell  4.1. 

!)     Fair  Fldele.    2v T.    A.    Arne  4d. 

10  0  hush  thee,  my  bable.    2  v N.  W.  Gade  i.l. 

11  The  throstle.    2v King  Hall  i.l 

12  The  song  of  the  reeds.    2  v Henry  Smart  H 

13  Evening.  2  v I.  Tschaikowsky  4d. 

14  Orpheus  with  his  lute.     3  v Dorian  Pascal  4d. 

15  Hark,  hark,  the  lark.    3v Ernest  Walker  4d. 

16  Weep  you  no  more.    2v Martin  Shaw  4d. 

17  A  lake  and  a  fairy  boat.    3  v.   ...Julius  Harrison  4.1. 

18  Spinning  Song.    3  v R.  Wagner  4d. 

19  Cradle  song.    4v Lesley  Bamford  4d. 

20  Shoot,  false  love,  I  care  not  (Ballet).    ST. 

C.  E.  Miller  4.1. 

21  A  home  song.    3v Herbert  Antcliffe  4d. 

22  A  Song  of  Spring.     3v F.   Gumbert  4d. 

23  Down  Rathmin  Lane.    2v (  uthbert  Forster  4d. 

24  Robin  Redbreast.    2v Alec  Rowley  3d. 


9d.      — 


6d. 


M. 
6d 


2<t. 


3d. 
3d. 


U 
M. 


SERIES  22  (2  &  3  Treble  Voices). 

O.K. 
The  Dance.     2  v Edward  Elgar     4d. 


8 
9 
IM 
11 
12 
13 
14 
i:, 
Ifl 
17 
18 
10 

-0 

•Jl 


False  Love.     2v Edward  Elgar 

Lullaby.      2  v .....Edward  Klgar 

Aspiration.    2  v Edward  Elgar 

Daybreak.     3  v....  May  Day       } 

Ballad.    3v a  Vocal  Suite 

Noonday  Rest.     3v by  JOSEF       .- 

Rhyming  Game.  3  v RHEINBERGER  | 

Voyage  Homewards.  3  v *> 

A   Japanese   Lullaby.     2  v Eric  H.  Thlman 

To   Meadows.     3    v Eric  H.  Thlman 

The  Nymph's  Song.    2  v Edgar  Balnton 

Passing  of  Summer.    2  v Stuart  Young 

To  a  Skylark.    2v Cuthbert  Forster 

Love  Is  a  Sickness.   3  v Eric  A.  Smith 

The  Goblins'  Feast.    2  v Granville  Bantock 

If  you  see  a  Fairy  Ring.    2  v Mansel  Thomas 

The  Rowan  Elf.    2  v Granville  Bantock 

There  be  none  of  Beauty's  Daughters.    2  T. 

Gilbert  A.  Alcock 


4d. 
4d. 
3d. 

4.1. 
I.I. 
I.I 

6d. 

M. 
i.l. 
4d. 
1. 1. 
3d. 
i.l. 
4d. 
4d. 
3d. 
4d. 

3d. 


Sol-fa. 
3d. 
3d. 
3d. 
2d. 


(«) 

(O 
(O 
(c) 


(*) 
(e) 


SERIES  24  (2,  3  &  4  Treble  Voices). 

Arranged  and  Edited  b\i  GUANVILLE  BANTOCK. 

May  dew.    2v W.S.Bennett  4d. 

Children's  morning  hymn.     2  v H.  Berlioz  4d. 

The  fate  of  the  roses.    2v C.  Chamlnade  4d. 

Come  0  slumber.     2  v Ch.  Gluck  4d. 

The  dream.     2  v J.  Haydn  4d. 

The  hum  of  the  bees.    2  v K.Mendelssohn  4d.     3d. 

The  triumph  of  fate.    2  v H.  Purcell  i.l. 

The  angel.    2  v A.  Hubinstein  4d.      — 

Wanderer's  night  song.    2  v A.  Rubinstein  4d. 

Song  of  the  shepherdesses.    2  v F.  Schubert  4d. 

Happiness.    2v R.  Schumann  4d. 

Love's  garden.     2  v R.  Schumann  4d. 

May  song.    2v R.  Schumann  4d. 

O  come  with  us  and  wander.  2  \....R.  Schumann  4d. 

O  happy  snow.    2  v R.  Schumann  4d. 

Song  of  spring.    2v R.  Schumann  4d. 

The  gipsies'  revel.    2  v R.  Schumann  4d. 

To  the  evening  star.     2v R.  Schumann  4d. 

To  the  nightingale.    2  v K.  Schumann  4d. 

Evening   song.     2  v L.  Spohr  4d. 

Rest.     2    v L.  Spohr  4d. 

The  heart  may  never  know.    2  v L.  Spohr  4d. 

Aurora  Is  waking.    2v A.  Goring  Thomas  4.1. 

Dawn  (See,  the  dawn's  rosy  ray  !).    2  v. 

P.  Tschaikowsky  4d.      — 

Tears.     2  v P.  Tschaikowsky  4d. 

Chorus  of  swan-maidens.    :i  v F.Pascal  6d. 

Coronach.     3  v F.  Schubert  6d. 

Hallelujah.       3v F.Schubert  6d. 

Quiet  night.     3v R.Schumann  4d. 

0  days  that  are  no  more.  3  v R.Schumann  4.1. 

Wake,  lovely  rose.    3  v K.  Schumann  i.l. 

God  Is  my  shepherd.    4  v F.  Schubert  M. 

God    in    nature.     4  v F.  Schubert  8d. 

Serenade  (4  v.  &  solo) F.  Schubert  8d.      — 


London  :   JOSEPH   WILLIAMS  LIMITED,  32  Great  Portland  Street,  W.I. 


8283 


AURAL  CULTURE  BASED  UPON 
MUSICAL  APPRECIATION. 


INTRODUCTORY  CHAPTER 

EXPLANATORY    OF    THE    SCOPE    AND    PURPOSE    OF    THE 

PRESENT   WORK. 

THE  subject  of  Ear- training,  or  as  it  should  rather  be  termed,  the 
cultivation  of  aural  perception,  is,  after  a  long  period  of  neglect,*  at 
last  coming  into  its  own,  and  is  gradually  being  recognized  as  the  one 
matter  of  vital  importance  underlying  all  musical  education  worthy 
the  name.  It  is  dawning  upon  the  minds  of  musicians  to  whom  the 
very  idea  of  Ear-training  was  as  something  strange  and  un-heard  of 
in  schemes  of  musical  work,  that  it  may  be  even  more  necessary, 
for  real  progress,  to  train  the  mind  than  to  train  the  fingers,  and 
educationists  who  have  long  felt  that  there  was  something  radically 
Educational  wrong  m  existing  methods  of  general  music-study  are 
value  of  welcoming  the  newer  aspect  of  things  in  a  spirit  of 

sympathy,  born  of  a  realization  that  it  may  be  possible 
to  make  music  a  subject  of  real  value  in  a  liberal  education,  instead 
of  a  mere  amiable  accomplishment  absorbing  a  great  deal  of  time 
for  a  singularly  poor  return.  It  must  in  fairness  be  confessed  that 
the  question  of  Ear-training  has  in  the  past  not  infrequently  been 
presented  in  a  not  altogether  attractive  light,  and  musicians  of  an 
impulsively  artistic  temperament  have,  with  some  little  show  of 
reason,  been  wont  to  complain  that  skill  in  certain  of  its  aspects 
was  often  acquired  at  the  expense  of  some  of  the  subtler  esthetic 
qualities,  and  also  that  not  a  few  of  those  possessed  of  the 
power  of  recognizing  sounds  and  of  naming  them  when  heard, 
tvere  distinctly  lacking  in  actual  musical  instinct.  The  reason  for 

*  Save  by  the  Tonic  Sol-faists,  who  for  many  years  were  the  only  public  body 
who  persistently  drew  attention  to  the  matter,  and  whose  splendid  work  in  this  field 
cannot  be  too  strongly  eulogized. 


2  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

this  is  not  far  to  seek ;  it  lies,  not  in  the  subject  itself,  but  in  the 
manner  of  its  presentation.  Two  matters,  and  two  matters  only, 
have  too  often  been  considered  as  essential  in  any 
deflctenSesf  scheme  of  Ear-training  work,  viz.,  Pitch  and  Time. 
The  recognition  of  these  by  the  pupil,  and  the  ability 
to  sing  at  sight  passages  in  which  these  two  elements  were  taken 
both  separately  and  in  combination,  have  constituted  the  be-all  and 
end-all  of  much  teaching  in  the  past.  The  power  gained  even  in 
this  limited  field  is  something  to  be  thankful  for,  but  it  is  none  the 
less  true  that  the  result  was  frequently  of  a  purely  technical  kind, 
and  music  was  often  at  a  discount  during  the  lessons. 

The  grasping  of  the  ideas  of  Pitch  and  Time  must,  of  course,  be 
the  foundation-factor  in  any  scheme  of  work,  but  there  are  two 
Rhvthm  and  otner  Aspects  of  the  subject  of  equal  importance,  the 
aesthetic  omission  of  which  will  render  Ear-training  work  sterile 

and  unfruitful, — the  development  of  the  rhythmic  sense, 
and  the  cultivation  of  the  aesthetic  perception  of  the  music.  In  the 
opinion  of  the  authors  of  this  book,  all  Ear-training  work  must  be 
based  upon  Musical  Appreciation  ;  the  technical  side  must  never  be 
divorced  from  the  aesthetic,  and  the  whole  aim  of  the  study  must 
be  the  fostering  of  real  musical  perception  in  the  pupil. 

In  the  present  work  the  authors  have  endeavoured  from  the  very 
first  to  consider  everything  from  the  one  standpoint  of  Music,  and 
every  lesson  is  therefore  built-up  upon  a  consideration  of  some 
definite  composition,  even  from  the  point  at  which  the  pupil  is  taught 
to  absorb  the  underlying  idea  of  Pulse  and  to  discern  the  difference 
in  Pitch  between  two  sounds.  In  other  words,  the  "technique"  of 
the  subject  is  extracted  from  the  music,  instead  of  being  presented  to 
the  pupil  baldly,  qua  "  technique,"  as  something  which  is  to  lead  to 
music — some  day.  The  dilh'culty  of  carrying  out  this  plan  lay 
naturally  in  the  earliest  stages,  where  the  impossibility  of  finding 
tunes  containing  only  the  particular  scale-degrees  to  be  introduced  to 
the  pupil's  notice  step  by  step,  constituted  a  very  real  obstacle. 
This  obstacle  has,  it  is  believed,  been  overcome  by  the  writing  of 
several  special  tunes  for  the  purpose,  in  each  of  which  some  new  fact 
of  Time,  Rhythm,  Scale-relationship  or  Mental  effect  is  presented  for 
his  consideration. 

On  this  basis  the  authors  feel  that  it  is  possible  to  train  the  child 
to  observe  with  his  ears,  and  so  to  create  such  an  attitude  of  mind 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  3 

that  he  will,  as  he  progresses,  find  himself  consciously  absorbing  many 
of  those  beautiful  points  of  detail  in  music  which,  to  the  uncultured 

Trainine*  ear>  are  "as  Chough  ^hey  were  not."     And  it  should 

in  aural  surely  be  clear  that  if  the  listening  to,  and  appreciation 

jrva  ion.     Q£  mus-c  is  to  j^  something  more  than  purely  sensuous 

gratification,  it  must  connote  the  alert  use  of  our  faculties,  and  the 
drawing  out  of  our  best  efforts  of  mind  and  will,  really  to  hear  what 
the  composer  has  written. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  of  course  true  that  the  pupil  may 
be  brought  into  touch  at  an  early  age  with  a  good  deal  of  music 
to  which — although  he  will  not  be  able  to  grasp  it 
consciously  or  fully — he  will  yet  enjoy  listening,  in  a 
general  sort  of  way.  This  is  a  branch  of  musical 
education  which  it  is  most  important  to  carry  on  side  by  side  with 
the  more  conscious  assimilation  of  the  material  of  the  music,  to  which 
allusion  has  already  been  made.  It  is  comparable  to  surrounding  the 
child  in  daily  life  with  beautiful  pictures,  or  reading  aloud  to  him  noble 
poems,  of  whose  full  meaning  he  may  at  the  time  be  largely  ignorant, 
but  whose  general  "atmosphere"  he  nevertheless  instinctively  feels, 
and  whose  true  significance  will  gradually  reveal  itself  to  him  as  his 
mind  and  his  whole  nature  expand  to  the  realities  of  existence. 

In  choosing  the  music  to  be  played,  however,  the  teacher  must 

studiously  avoid  "  shooting  too  far  over  the  pupil's  head  " ;  it  should 

hardly  need  enforcing  here  that  works  of  a  profound 

music!  °  or  complex  nature  are  entirely  unsuitable,  and  defeat 

the  object  for  which  they  are  selected.*     As  a  help  to 

the  teacher  who  may  wish  thus  to   stimulate   his  pupil's   musical 

imagination,  a  list  of  pieces  suitable  for  use  in  this  way  has  been 

compiled,  and  will  be  found  on  page  112. 

The  complete  course  planned  by  the  authors  of  the  present  work 
is  arranged  in  three  parts,  Part  I  representing  about  as  much  as  the 
average  child  will,  in  all  probability,  absorb  during  the  first  few 
months,  or  even  the  first  year,  of  his  study,  the  remaining  parts 
leading  him  on  to  the  point  at  which  he  will  be  in  a  position  to  profit 
by  regular  lessons  in  the  constructive  side  of  Harmony,  and  in  more 
advanced  Musical  Appreciation. 

*  In  this  connexion  it  may  be  said  that  the  lists  of  works  for  children's 
consumption,  drawn  up  in  certain  educational  journals,  are  proof  of  singularly  warped 
ideas  on  the  subject.  The  one  and  only  result  of  such  a  bill  of  fare  would  inevitably 
be  a  fit  of  mental  indigestion  ! 


AOBAL   CULTURE   BASED    UPON 


DIRECTIONS  TO  THE  TEACHER. 


1. — This  book  is  intended  purely  as  a  guide  to  the  teacher,  and 
it  is  not  the  wish  of  the  authors  that  it  should  be  regarded  as  setting 
forth  any  rigid,  prescribed  system  of  teaching. 

2. — While  it  is  desirable — and  necessary — that  the  order  in 
which  the  subjects  are  presented  shall  be  followed  closely,  any  slavish 
adherence  to  the  words  of  the  various  lessons  is  to  be  deprecated. 
The  teacher  should,  from  the  very  first,  endeavour  to  clothe  the  ideas 
of  the  lessons  in  his  or  her  own  language,  in  order  to  avoid  any 
suspicion  of  formality,  and  also  to  cope  with  those  special  exigencies 
which  are  bound  to  arise  from  time  to  time,  either  in  class  or 
individual  teaching. 

3. — It  is  absolutely  essential  that  the  pupil  should  be  taught 
from  the  outset  to  realize  and  appreciate  (i.e.,  apprehend)  Music,  and 
to  think  musically ;  any  temptation,  therefore,  on  the  part  of  the 
teacher  to  regard  him  as  a  receptacle  for  the  mere  storing  of  facts 
should  be  strenuously  resisted.  His  knowledge  should,  moreover,  be 
gained  experimentally,  that  is,  in  the  first  instance  through  contact 
with,  and  observation  of,  certain  musical  compositions  suited  to  his 
comprehension,  in  which  he  can  feel  interest  and  pleasure.  By  this 
means  he  will  the  more  easily  and  surely  be  led  on  to  the  grasping  of 
general  principles.  In  other  words,  it  is  better,  in  the  early  days 
of  the  pupil's  training,  for  the  teacher  to  work  inductively,  rather 
than  deductively. 

4. — The  various  Steps  into  which  the  work  is  divided  merely 
indicate  stages  of  progress  in  the  learner's  study,  and  any  one  of  them 
may  quite  conceivably  be  found  to  contain  enough  material  for 
several  lessons.  The  actual  amount  of  ground  covered  at  each  lesson 
must  be  a  matter  for  the  teacher's  discretion. 

5. — It  will  be  noticed  that  each  Step  consists  of  two  parts, 
(a)  and  (b).  Part  (a)  deals  specially  with  Time  and  Rhythm,  and 
Part  (b)  with  the  relationships  of  Pitch.  The  study  of  each  of  these 
salient  musical  facts  is  based  in  each  Step  upon  some  composition 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  5 

selected  for  the  purpose,*  which  thus  forms,  as  it  were,  the  "text"  of 
the  lesson.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  teacher  should 
make  a  point  of  knowing  these  pieces  by  heart,  so  that  his  whole 
attention  can  be  given  to  the  proper  carrying-out  of  the  details  of  the 
lessons  founded  upon  them. 

6. — Each  Rhythmic  Exercise  has,  moreover,  a  double  use ;  the 
intention  is  (i)  that  it  should  be  played  to  the  pupil  as  a  study  in 
Pulse  and  Time,  (ii)  th.it  its  melody  (as  indicated  on  the  highest 
staff)  should  be  subsequently  utilized  as  an  Ear-test,  not  only  in 
Time  and  Rhythm,  but  also  in  Pitch,  in  order  to  recall  and  to  impress 
more  deeply  the  subject  of  the  (b)  portion  of  the  previous  Step. 

7. — As  a  general  rule,  the  plan  of  each  lesson  should  be  as 
follows  : — 

(i)  The  pupil  should  be  told  to  listen  to  the  tune  as  it  is 
played  by  the  teacher.  (N.B. — In  the  case  of  the 
Nursery  Rhymes  in  the  (b)  portion  of  each  Step,  the 
pupil  should  learn  the  tune  by  rote.) 

(ii)  The  teacher  should  then  help  him  to  bring  his 
intelligence  to  bear  upon  it,  and  should  seek  to  draw 
out  from  him  what  he  has  observed  as  to  its  character 
and  as  to  the  various  details  of  Time,  Rhythm,  or  Pitch, 
as  the  case  may  be. 

(iii)  Upon  this  the  teacher  should  build,  and  develop  the 
special  matters  which  the  lesson  is  intended  to  enforce, 
(iv)  In  order  still  further  to  impress  upon  the  pupil's 
memory  the  various  points  thus  learnt  from  a  study  of 
the  tune,  Dictation  and  Sight-singing  exercises  should 
be  given  as  directed.  By  these  means  the  correlation 
of  sound  with  notation  is  arrived  at,  and  the  "  thing " 
connected  with  its  "  symbol." 

(v)  The  home-preparation  given  to  the  pupil  should  aim  at 
drawing  out  his  power  of  doing  things  for  himself. 
Most  children  are  capable  of  a  certain  amount  of 
original  invention,  and  it  will  be  found  that  many  will, 
after  a  short  time,  be  able  to  construct  little  tunes  for 
themselves,  embodying  the  main  points  of  the  preceding 
lesson.  In  such  work — which  need  not  absorb  much 

*  In  this  volume  (Part  I  of  the  whole  work)  these  have  been  specially  written 
with  this  object  in  view. 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

time  or  labour — children  take  the  keenest  interest,  as 
they  find  in  it  a  fresh  means  of  self-expression.  Even 
the  Kindergarten  child  who,  in  response  to  his  teacher's 
singing  of  (it  may  be)  a  simple  fragment  of  tune  such 
as  the  following :— 


pipes  in  his  tiny  voice — without  any  thought  of  the 
technicalities  of  notation,  of  which  at  that  particular 
stage  he  would  know  nothing  —  another  fragment 
something  like  this  :— 


has  taken  the  first  step  along  the  desired  path,  and 
experiences  a  sense  of  real  delight  in  the  consciousness 
that  he  really  has  "  made  something  "  himself.  At  the 
same  time  he  has,  without  effort  or  undue  labour,  learnt 
an  important  fact  connected  with  the  musical  *'  phrase  " 
which  will  stand  him  in  good  stead  later  on,  when  the 
more  technical  part  of  his  work  begins.  The  object, 
it  need  hardly  be  said,  of  such  constructive  work  is  not 
to  endeavour  to  breed  a  race  of  composers;  such  an 
idea  would  be  as  absurd  as  it  would  be  utterly 
beside  the  mark.  What  is  aimed  at,  however,  is  the 
application  to  music-study  of  the  saner  ideas  now 
gaining  ground  with  reference  to  the  training  of  the 
pupil's  powers  of  observation  and  imagination  by  means 
of  drawing.  As  Miss  Marie  Salt  well  says  in  her  notes 
upon  "  Music  and  the  Young  Child  "  (see  Appendix), 
"  in  the  drawing  lesson  of  a  generation  or  so  ago  the 
child  ....  learned  to  copy  ....  but  could 
not  originate";  now  the  ability  thus  to  originate, 
however  feebly,  is  beginning  to  be  recognized  as  lying  at 
the  root  of  all  real  and  lasting  progress  in  those  aspects 
of  mental  development  which  the  use  of  pencil  or  brush 
is  supposed  effectively  to  encourage  and  to  stimulate. 
8. — The  authors  would  like  here  to  point  out  that  it  is  of  the 
first  importance  that  the  teacher  should  illustrate  what  he  is  teaching 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION,  1 

by  means  of  copious  musical  examples.  It  matters  not  with  what 
particular  fact  he  may  be  dealing — it  may  be  the  mental  effect 
of  one  of  the  degrees  of  the  scale,  the  grouping  of  the  pulses 
in  Triple  Time,  the  employment  of  a  "  feminine  ending "  to  a 
phrase — whatever  it  is,  an  example  should  be  forthcoming,  either 
original,  or  carefully  chosen  from  some  well-known  work.  The 
ability  to  extemporize  neatly  and  musically  is  an  asset  of  incalculable 
value  in  the  teacher's  equipment;  but,  even  if  his  power  in  this 
direction  be  small,  or  perhaps  non-existent,  the  need  for  the 
appropriate  example  still  remains,  and  it  should  be  one  of  his  first 
aims  to  gather  together,  for  his  own  use,  an  extensive  collection 
of  quotations  from  standard  works  with  which  to  drive  home,  in 
the  only  effective  way,  that  which  he  is  endeavouring  to  teach. 

9. — Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  pieces  for  "sub- 
conscious listening"  (see  page  3).  These  pieces  have  been  chosen 
with  particular  reference  to  their  value  as  a  means  of  developing  the 
pupil's  powers  of  imagination,  and  it  is  suggested  that  they  should 
from  time  to  time  be  played  to  him  by  the  teacher — without  comment 
on  the  technical  side — and  thus  supply  the  more  recreative  element  in 
connexion  with  the  various  lessons  of  the  book. 


Cordial  acknowledgment  is  here  made  of  valuable  help  gained 
from  the  writings  of  the  following  authors  : — 

(i)  The  late  Mr.  John  Curwen,  the  originator  of  the  Tonic 
Sol-fa  movement,  whose  sound  educational  views 
are  becoming  more  and  more  widely  recognized  by 
musicians,  and  the  main  principles  of  whose  teaching 
must  underlie  all  effective  training  in  the  appreciation 
of  pitch-relationships.  The  authors  desire  to  state 
here  that  they  have  followed  out  Tonic  Sol-fa  ideas — 
with  certain  modifications — in  the  present  volume,  so 
far  as  it  relates  to  the  teaching  of  these  relationships, 
(ii)  Aime  Paris,  whose  valuable  "Time-names"  form  a  most 
ingenious  and  necessary  link  between  sound  and  notation, 
(iii)  Airs.  J.  Spencer  Curwen,  to  whom  all  interested  in  the 
progress  of  music  in  this  country  owe  the  warmest  debt 
of  gratitude  as  one  of  the  foremost  and  most  enlightened 
pioneers  in  the  teaching  of  the  young. 


8  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

(iv)  Mr.  Tobias  Matthay,  who,  in  the  authors'  opinion,  was 
the  first  writer  systematically  to  set  forth  the  true  idea 
of  rhythmic  progression  in  musical  performance, 
(v)  Dr.  Yorke  Trotter,  whose  able  insistence  upon  the  value 
of  the  "  phrase-unit "  in  all  sound  musical  teaching  is 
here  warmly  recognized. 

The  authors  wish  to  place  on  record,  moreover,  the  valuable 
work  done  in  the  cause  of  musical  education  by  Mons.  Jaques- 
Dalcroze,  whose  system  of  Rhythmic  Gymnastics  has  been  referred  to 
on  several  occasions  in  the  following  pages ;  by  Mona.  Mathis  Lusty, 
the  author  of  important  works  in  the  French  language  on  the  subject 
of  Rhythm ;  and  by  Dr.  W.  G.  McNaught,  whose  wide  experience 
in  all  matters  relating  to  Ear-training  and  Sight-singing  is  so  well 
known  and  so  rightly  esteemed. 

Finally,  the  thanks  of  the  authors  are  duo  to  Messrs.  Curwen  & 
Sons  for  their  courtesy  in  according  permission  for  the  use  in  this 
volume  of  the  Tonic  Sol-fa  Hand-signs. 


%*  Important  Note  to  the  Teacher  as  to  the  use  of  the  Rhythmic 

Exercises. 

Each  Rhythmic  Exercise  in  this  Part  of  the  work  should  be 
played  to  the  pupil  in  its  entirety  as  the  first  stage  of  the  lesson, 
the  melody  on  the  highest  staff  being  for  the  moment  disregarded. 
After  the  development  of  the  lesson,  as  set  forth  in  the  letterpress 
dealing  with  the  (a)  portion  of  each  Step,  the  final  stages  should 
invariably  be  (i)  the  learning  by  the  pupil  of  the  tune  of  the 
Rhythmic  Exercise  (which  he  has  already  written  down  from 
dictation),  and  (ii)  the  singing  of  the  same  to  his  own  beating  of  the 
time  (or  marching),  while  the  teacher  plays  the  accompaniment 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


PART  I. 


STEP  I  (a).  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  1.*  E.  E. 

NOTE. — The  lessons  in  connexion  with  this  and  succeeding  Exercises  will  be 
found  on  page  33  and  on  subsequent  pages. 
Moderate,  nlla  marcia. 


Introduction 

of  the 
idea  of  Pulse. 


Other  pieces  useful  as  Bhythmic  Exercises  at  this  stage  are : — 

(1)  Soldiers'  Chorus  from  "  Faust " GOUNOD. 

(2)  Bridal  March  from  "  Lohengrin  " WAONEB. 

(3)  March  from  the  Occasional  Overture        HANDEL. 

4)  March  from  the  Concertstiick         WEBER. 

5)  March  of  the  Merionethshire  Men  (No.  100  in  HADOW'S  "  Songs  of  the  British 

Islands."     Curwen  &  Sons.) 
(6)  Old  English  Melody,  "  Heart  of  Oak"  (No.  56  in  "  Songs  of  the  British  Islands  "). 

*  The  melody  on  the  upper  staff  of  this  Exercise  is  not  intended  in  the  first  place  to  be  sung  by 
the  pupil.   It  may,  however,  be  utilized  as  an  alternative  Dictation  test  in  connexion  with  Step  II  (a). 


10 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  I  (b).  Little   Boy  Blue. 

Moderate.  mf          _« ==== 

Introduction       Q-g 


E.  R. 


Doh 


of 


soh 


10)    ' 


Little  boy  blue, come  blow  up  your  horn 


(Trumpet.  J 


Terras 

•^-    -0-         P    ATrnrn 


(Trumpet.) 


? 


*          *•       * 


j  j    J 

m 


^ 


=1J|     J          J^   J*J*    J          j 


(Echo.) 


The  sheep's  i  n  tho  meadow,  the  cow's  in   the  corn;. 


B 


E 


(Trumpet.) 


/' 


^P= 


tranyuillo. 


^=^J 


^ 


9^^5 


Where  is    the  boy  that  looks  af  -  ter  the  sheep  ?         Un  -  dor  the  hay-cock 


Ped.         *    ped.  «     Ped.        *   Ped.        # 


Pod. 


n 


fast 


a    -    sleep. 


L.H. 


-E 


*  An  easier  alternative  tt^e  will  be  found  on  page  103. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


11 


STEP  II  (a).         Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  2. 

Moderate  maestoso.  •$ 


E.  E. 


Introduction  ~y~n 

~t  Ji.  _ 


of 
Duple  Time. 


Fed. 


3=* 


T~T^ 


* 


i  ;•; 

*^r     w        V     • 


Other  tunes  in  Duple  Time  useful  as  Ehythmio  Exercises  at  this  stage  are : — 

1}  "  The  Keel  Eow  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands,  No.  25). 

2)  "  The  Little  Man  "  (No.  12  of  Nursery  Rhymes  edited  by  Moffat  and  Kidson). 

3)  "  Hot  Cross  Buns  "  (No.  53  „  „  „  ). 

*  The  voice-part  of  this  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  not  be  used  until  required  as  a  Dictation 
Exercise  as  explained  on  page  40. 


12 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  II  (b).  Baa,  baa,  Black  Sheep.* 


Introduction 

of 
Upper  Dob. 


Moderate. 


doh1 

• 

soh 

• 

doh 


t\p 

Z  ' 


E.  E. 

5 


ft  ± 

3*=^ 

" 


m  m 


Baa,        baa,  Black      Sheep,          have  you       a   -    ny       wool? 


f> 


=t 


J 


Yes,  sir, 


yea, 


sir,  three  bags 


fuU: 


^L 


I 


s 


m 


One  for     the     mas    -     -    tor,    and     one  for     the    dame, 


And 


1 


r~T^r 


& 


r 


j=3-ji 


rail. 

A 


f  t  S  J 


^   J  J '  .J. 


one 

A 


for     the        lit  •  tie     boy    that     lives  down  our       lane. 


*  An  easier  alternative  tune  will  be  found  on  page  104. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


STEP  III  (a).        Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  3. 

Moderatn  marcato. 

Introduction 

of 
Triple  Time. 


E.  R. 


^^ 


Mnderato  marcato. 


:g=r- 


3 


i 


iHH 


f  i    £r 


i- 

" 


i^J 


3 


^j=2 


^ 


-0-1- 


m 


n 


y 


Y 


J  Jlr  J  .'lr 


poco  rit. 


I 


i 


1^ 


* 


poco  nt. 


/• 


? 


Other  tunes  useful  as  Ehythmic  Exercises  at  this  stage  are : — 

(1)  Sir  Koger  de  Coverley  Old  English  Tune. 

(2)  Minuet  in  E|?    (Marches  and  Dances,   "Rhythmic   Series." 

Boosey  &  Co.) BOCCHKRIKI. 

(3)  Minuet  in  P  (Marches  and  Dances,  "  Rhythmic  Series")       ...  MOZART. 

(4)  God  save  the  King     ...        Dr.  JOHN  BULL. 


*  The  melody  to  be  used  as  a  dictation  test.     (See  note  to  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  2.) 


14 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  III  (b). 


Hush-a-by,  Baby.' 


E.  R. 


of  Me. 

(flY^~H  =  

' 

Cant  ant 

doh1 
soh 
me 
doh 

to.    -                                   =>             ^  , 

Jtfyfr  fi  ""  

-iH  sH  — 

| 

,  
Opp  una  corda. 

~         - 

^          1 

{jQ+Zlt 

i  i  «r  r  "Ji 

1  d  r-  d— 

1  d  —  h  =1- 

fe± 

J.  Jjjrn 


^ 


Hush  -  a  -  by,  Ba  -  by,      on   the  tree  top, 


When  the  wind  blows  the   era-  die  will  rock ;       When  the  bough  breaks  the     era  -  die  will  fall, 


Down  will  come  ba    -    by,      era  -  die  and   all. 


m 

-I   .    W — I- 


fc2 


*M9— ^  *  Sp  In   -^ 

*»/M/I  /»nr///r 


uwa  corda. 
rtV. 


"P" 


bp-  • 


*  An  easier  alternative  tun<5  will  be  found  on  page  105 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


15 


STEP  IV  (a).        Rhythmic  Exercise,   No.  4. 

Andante. 


E.  B. 


Introduction       Q  _,  fr 
of  Quadruple 
Time. 


legato.  J^J  -4       J          I 

.       ,<•     *.*j4,r-5-M 


J  Jir  r  r  r  i  j  j  J^TTJT^TTJJ 


) 


- 


1      h»    -g- 

"1  1    ^ 


b 


^ 


r          F"  "Ped.      * 

Other  tunes  useful  as  Ehythmic  exercises  at  this  stage  are  : — 

(1)  "  Men  of  Harlech  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands,  No.  32). 

(2)  Soldiers' Chorus  from  "  Faust  "         ...     GOUNOD. 

(3)  March  from  the  Concertstiick ...         ...     WEBEB. 

*  The  melody  from  this  point  is  intended  to  be  used  as  a  dictation  exercise  and  then  sung  as  a  march. 


16 


AURAL    CULTURE   BASED    UPON 


STEP  IV  (b).         Who  killed  Cock  Robin?* 


E.  R. 


Introduction 
of  Te. 


Marcia  Funebre;  Largo. 


doh1 

te 
soh 

me 
doh 


/> 


Who  kill'd  Cock  Robin  ?  Who  kill'd  Cock  Robin  ? 


Marcia  Funebre;  Laryo. 


r  JN  p-pc  rH^-Jv^ 


£ 


I,       said  the  spar-row,  with   my      bow    and  ar  -  row,          I      killed  Cock  Rob -in. 


*  An  easier  alternative  tune  will  be  found  on  page  106. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


17 


STEP  V  (a).        Rhythmic  Exercise    No.  5. 


E.  E. 


Introduction 

of  Two-pulse 

sound. 


Andante  maeatow. 


/ 

Andante  maestoso. 

_/: 


1?  2     Q 


¥ 


1= 


S 

?=3 


-  >marcato  la 
JS(.  melodia. 


±t 


r^r 


e 


i 


^ 


F 
^ 


i^ 


T 


r 

V 


±t 


3 


^ 


^ 


r 


^ 


r 


V 

Fed. 


18 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  V  (b).  Bye,  Baby  Bunting.* 

Andante  moderato. 


E.  E. 


Introduction 
of  Bay. 


dohi 
te 

soh 

me 
ray 
doh 


F>- 


J  '  ir  J  J=g 


Bye,  Ba      -     by     Bunt       -      ing, 


Dad  -  dy's  gone    a 


tD 


.  ^    a.-^f-  -?•  -**    ^&? 


P 


-f     - 

Ped.         *     "^ S        simile. 

Ped.         » 


get          a         lit    -     tie        rab    -    bit's  skin,     To 


wrap  Ba    -    by  Bunt     -     ing     in,  Bye,         Ba- by  Bunt     -     ing. 


r 


*  An  .easier  alternative  tune  will  be  found  on  page  107. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


19 


STEP  VI  (a).         Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  6. 


E.  R 


Moderato. 


ntroauction 
of  Three- 

TTT^-                         i  —    1  1  

ulse  sound. 

W  —  4-^j  ^-^  ^  ^--  ^— 

Moderato.    With  strongly  marked  accents.                 A                  ?     > 

V  ffjt  fl  —                 —          1  —          1  — 

fe  4  —                        ;E3  —  '  —                                      —  ^  —  :  —          —  d  —  :  — 

^}          ^=4-  •            zar"i            -^—         S«            m~» 

y-g-  •                   ^                       KL"P 

/w\«  *t  'i                                              i      i 

^;  %  ^  —  f2  •  1  1  —  d  1  1  1  1  
^•^  ff  4-  —  !  1  1  =1  —  ^  —  ^  d  1  1  1  1  —  ~t~ 

• 

—  I    J  '  -^  —  ^:  —  ^-L-  **  —          "—  ^  —  *  —  .j.      i  —  J.  4 

(This  bass  part  may  be  played  in  8ves,  if  preferred,  as  far  as  the  X). 

P^ 

^                               5              x-                                                                 ^ 

#  —  ^J 

_^_                          ^_                                                                        _^_                            _p_ 

,^-|     •                           cJ     •                           \                                     1 

^> 
S~ 

-^                                    V                                    >•                                   > 

—  --.  •                                                            ^  -~—l*                                ^ 

..£ 

"^  —                                                                     —  ry^'  —   |^  P  — 

\  *J        ~*~ 

—  P  —  *$p  —  '  —  ^l    y1^  *_,  £2^1'  jp  —  '  —  |  vcJ.  1  —  '  —  '  cJ'  1  1       ' 

:           **            _     ' 

f      /A^fl  & 

1                  1               ^                           ^" 

(•"'*  **> 

.  1  J  p  f  ^— 

1  EEs  —  h 

_^  1  1  1  1  (—              ^  *  ^  

4 

1    ^      ^    t^     ^      ^     J 

D**^ 

^                           -^                                                                   ^^ 

i/  ^  i. 

1 

XT'      J 

I 

^£B  —  ~~  —  ^ 

^"^  —                                                                       —  ?j  —  •  — 

t/         -~> 

"      „     "^~~^  J^x  P--^-- 

y/     fffl  

—  kt^  —  T  —  h*  —  ^*  —  r  —  b&  —  ^  —  I?*  — 

($)  5 

4-^  H  —  —  g-  —      ^S~  —  *  —                             —  K  — 

^ 

-(22.   .                         -£2_   .                         H^"   * 

1  In  —  P  i  I  r~l          —  —  rl  1 

(<•).  s,i    j 

_^j  j  r  r  r  ^ 

C  1_|  1  1  1  1  1 

X 

n<J  "^ 

y  »j. 

I  J_  f±i_  :  j  

<_/                 ~> 

>                                >  f) 

>                                                                   > 

-jHk  —  • 

—  b  I     _  i-u^            J  i        I  ....   _.     .1   A'-              pj  •  [j 

m  —  -* 

.  ...f...-  •k.A-pn  *^  f      »      §  :            =   g  :      H 

tx 

"•***"          1                                          """""••».              ^*"  \                     "*  —                 ^^^^"^ 

/• 

••""                     *f                                            ~~**         "^                          %) 

f 

TS  —  f  —  F~T|-  —  F  —  r  1  —  r  —  ^~:  —  fl 

1  —  L_ 

jf    1     '   ^P—  J  —  i  —  j—  J  —  T  —  p=  —  II 
•p^^"*"  .  — 

20 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP 

Introducti 
of  Fah 

VI 

on 

(b).       The  North  Wind  doth  blow.*                B.  R 

Andante.      __^_K____—  —                _->.         9                    ->. 

^    ttj^7"/- 

1  1  d  ^  E  ^-  -W-  -=J- 

The       North    Wind      doth         blow           and          we       shall      have 
Andante. 
0  B,  /%  1  1  1  1  1  1  • 

doh1 
te 

soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 

<qr*4 

--rsl"                      —  » 

mf 

1      '    Lgj.  .                             '     Lsj.  •                                  —5-  "I—1 

13  :                   «•              T^            r 
i                   i              l 

/w\«  5     i% 

PvJ  **Jf  '  *         f* 

2    •                        f^                      J 

^-"-  —  *r  t||  

1  <rL-     •                                   i     !                               c?                      fi  J 

5 

fe                             *       'P"d-'            * 

7f~  #~ 

—  i  i  ll  J  i  1  d  1  

—  J- 

snow,             And 

Jr     4t                               1 

1    J       J        •   '    J       J        J    '    ^J 
wbat    will      the      rob    -   in       do      then,        poor     thing  : 

r~r  TT~:  ^>  i  "T  —  mf^\  &  —  i~n 

p*  H  • 

_j_  _ip_         _c_ 
pj          -J»  -^-          -d-    -t 

ere*.                                        ^J.            I           J 

Eg  J  —  ^  *~~&~~'  "g  • 

:     •       ^-    •£  •         i=r  • 

Fed. 


l>K-tt« 

&-^=^ 

Sit           in             a 

barn               and 

^^^ 

keep      him   -   self 

warm,         And 

-^»  **~~~* 

^^c* 

-          -           - 

> 

Jf  ^tt     ^  —   —  •  |l*l  — 

^i  

—  ~j             |  1  

6^——^     g     1      g  M1I    P 

—  Pi    *  1  

^  M  

—  ^  *  

^  *  —  F  —  l  —  F  LJ  j  —  u^ 

L—  h=n  J:  —  ' 

^gf  3t  *~ 

^JJs^1  ~%T~ 

1^ 

?                                1 

^L^      -+- 
i             i 

—  -  — 

i 

fcd  ^_ 

—  ^  — 

gJ    . 

i  1  

JMHJO 


3; 


^^ 


5 


hide     his     head       un  -  der       his      wing,  poor thing.  ^ 

/-^r 


i4: 


poco  rit,~ 


r  ^ 


Fed. 


Fed. 


Fed.  * 


An  easier  alternative  tune  will  be  found  on  page  108. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


21 


STEP  VII  (a).       Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  7. 


E.  B. 


Moderate  alia  mar  da. 


Introduction 

of  the 

Four-pulse 

sound. 


Moderate  alia  marcia. 


h""l>4 


i 


r 


*3& 


m 


Sl»b      1 


i^ 


3   5 


rfrH  —  ^  1 

1  H 

(fo^b  •• 

(>PJ 

i  n 

3 

r/i' 

M. 

0 

i  j 

> 

> 

i/  u  b    j  c^ 

.  —  feJ  —  H  —  • 

-^       •- 

•  —  ^ 

fft\"ft  \)  L  —  |  

-b«^H  —  J  —  * 

^; 

~~^=~^~^ 

v-4,/          ^     fi  ^-^ 

4W  P3            £ 

_f> 

s           "'f^' 

i  Cl^ 

er 

r 

-*-.   "F 
1  </r?/z.  t 

r 

^___  —  i  —  ,  —  |  —  j^ 

i           ^ 

i 

^ 

—  , 

=        f-n 

e^-^  J  •  H 

-^-^  J 

.  i  r  '  1 

Fed. 


22 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  VII  (b).  Old  Abram  Brown.* 

Andante  serioso. 
Introduction 


E.  R. 


of 


doh' 
te 

lah 

fah 

ray 
doh 


:m/z 


j  --  H 


m^ 


3 


Old  A    -    bram     Brown       is  dead       and       gone,      You'll 

Andante  serioso. 


E£          -r- 

—  1  j  — 

^     ^     ~_      _ 

^p^     = 

nev   -    er         see        him 

o                ~i     ~ 

o<   •  —  J  
more.                               He 

i  r  r  r  r  =< 

used       to        wear       a 

£  —  —  —  -J- 

F  J  -f»  —  *-J  -h- 

>.     ^  ll     1     J  i  1 

$  JJ  /V    J 

^0 

—  ~3^  ^^  .J*  g      g  g     ' 

I  «  «  85  ^J 

1                  1                  1 

(555                                 i 

J 

&:    J 

-.  —  »--H  —  J  — 

—  4-  

^^ 


long      brown     coat      That          but   -    ton'd     down       bo      -        fore, 


^ 


1C: 


J     J     J      J- 


Down, 


down, 


-- 
but  -  toned  down  be    -    fore. 


i.  j  j^fejirj.  J*  ^5-^3-- 

5t  #  ^X^  55     $  *:Jf 


^ 


*  An  alternative  tune  will  be  found  on  page  109. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


23 


STEP  VIII  (a).      Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  8. 

Allegretto  grazioso. 


E.  E. 


Introduction 

of  sounds 

lasting  for 

more  than 

one  bar. 


tj.  IjjJIJ. 

^ 


ores. 


Allegretto  grazioso. 


Fed. 


Fed. 


:zr 


J      J  |J    J| 

Q    *       *       ^j J- 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  VIII  (b). 


Little  Miss  Muffet. 


E.  B. 


Introductioo 

of  the 

complete 

Scale. 


Moderate,  with  well-marked  time. 
5 


doh' 
te 

lah 
soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 


T*-"*±/  1 1_-«"0«« I  I  I.  

*i  f  i    ,      ,  Z3 — i — ii  i  » 

±  j  jlj  j  I.1  J  JTT3  N  J  3|p     r 


Little  Miss  Muffet,    Sat  on  a     tuf-fet,     Eat-ing  some  curds  and  whey 


Moderate,  with  well-marked  time. 

m 


.«„ 
•P 


jj 

*  * 


- 
j 


Ped- 


>J.    U  J  J  I.J 


Eat-ing  some  curds     and       whey, There 


»*»ft£l-i«    Jl 


£*>* 


jj  j  ju  j  j 


^ 


camera    big  spi-der  And  sat  down  be-side  her,  And  frightened  Miss  Muf-fet    a  -  way,. 


g 


^vjul 


^ 


r1 — -f  f- 


dim. 


^1 


frightened  Miss  Muf-  fet    a  -  way. 


» 


>'    KJ    rttf 


r^y 


i 


dim.  e  rit. 


r" 


N.B. — A  simplified  accompaniment  to  this  song  will  be  found  on  page  110. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


25 


STEP  IX  (a).         Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  9. 

Alia  marcia. 

'-47-  A       \^ 
Vb4    J 


E.  E. 


Introduction 

of 
Syncopation. 


J    J       1 


& 


vl//a  marcia. 


P§ 


J  I  J    -I     .   J 


m 


1* 


T- 


Ped 


T 


Fed. 


rirr     fir  Mi 


§ 


^ 


a 


3: 


H* *- 


F  '    do 


I 


Ped. 


Ped. 


Fed. 


J 


I 


£ 


T 


-^"1 


sostenuto. 


v   '  'a         =t==:1 

Ped.  *    T* 


Fed. 


*     Ped. 


r    TTT 


Spsp 


H 1— P- 


r  —    - 

1      -V  -l  V 


Ped.  * 


i.    *  Ped. 


Ped. 


Ped. 


26  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

IX  (b).          As  Tommy  was  walking. 


E.  ii. 


Introduction 

of  the  three 

Primary 

Triads. 


3=5 


^m 


As  Tom-my  was  walk-ing  one  fine  sum  -  mer  day,       Some  cher-  ry    -    cheeked 
Moderate.  - 


"T* 

Fed.  *   Fed.     *  Fed.  *  Fed.     *  Fed. 

N.B. — A  simplified  accompaniment  to  this  song  will  be  found  on  page  111. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


27 


STEP  X  (a).         Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  10.  B.  E 

Allegretto.  •>  ^^      >  ; 


Introduction 

of  the 

Half-pulse 

sound. 


Ar—  2  Jp")      'i  —  i    °i—  "i    Art    -~i 
-J-  "5  ,"*  -4    J.  -4  -4  -*  -*-*  -Pi 

r  ?''??  ^  ^  4^?  ^1  »^ri^ 

il     'LjI'E.r  LJ1"  g 


leggiero. 


i 


fo .,  '.  g  it\ i-t-t 

r^-9-1}  [^       9        W         &        y        • — ^        I*         i 


Fed. 


*     Fed. 


28 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  X  (b).          One  Misty,  Moisty  Morning. 

Introduction 

of  sounds  Allcyro  moderate. 

below  Doh. 


E.  E. 


doh1 
te 

lah 
soh 

fah 
me 

ray 

doh 
te, 

lah, 
sohi 


^ 


3E 


One  misty,  mois-ty  morn-ing,  When  cloudy  was  the  wea  -  ther,     There  I  met  an 
Allegro  moderate.       •=>. 


Sfc 


ism 


m/ 


3 


^U 


4 


j     j 


^ 


^    y 


old       man,       Cloth- ed    all     in      lea  -    ther,      cloth -ed    all     in     lea   -  ther.  With 


h 

J 


r 


j 


cap    un  -  der    his    chin, 


Howd'youdo,      howd'youdo,      howd'youdo?    a- 


-  gain,  One    mis-ty,    mois-ty,    mis-ty,  mois-ty,   mis-ty,  mois-ty    morn  -  ing. 


Fed. 


«    Fed 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 

STEP  XI  (a).        Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  11. 


Introduction 

of  the 

One-and-a-half 
pulse  sound. 


Maestoso,  ten.         ten. 


E.  R. 

5 


i.          icn.  ten.  5    -  ^          ,. 


1/f      . 

Maestoso. 


With  well-marked  accents. 


h  » .   h  ^u 

J  A-  J  'AT 


5*= 


K 


a 


rnll. 


f      r  r 

1  ^    I 


P 


iJ    lid: 


B- 


1 


r 


30 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  XI  (b).  When  Little  Fred. 

Introduction 


E.  R. 


of  sounds 
below  Doh. 


A  llegretto. 


doh1 
te 

lah 
soh 
fah 


me 


When  lit-tleFredwascall'dtobed,He    always  act-ed  right,     Hekiss'd   mam- 


feSE&^^p=: 

*=*-1zik?p^i»>'t>.>-J»J» 


'V*«»->^W 

P         ttaccato. 


-J*J»-J 


=£ 


* 


,and  then      Pa  -  pa,  and  wish'd  them  all  good-night, He  made  no  noise  like 


naughty  boys,  but  gent  -  ly  upstairs,     Di  -  rect    -    ly  went  when  he       was  sent,  And 


poco  ri(. 


'       eostenuto.- 


al  -  ways  said  his      prayers And    al  -  ways  said     his    prayers. 


sostenuto. 


Fed. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION, 


31 


STEP  XII  (a).       Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  12. 


E.  E. 


Moderate.  ores. 


Introduction 

of  One-pulse 

rest. 


Moderato. 


i=p=^ 


dim. 


—i  —  M  

1- 

1  1  J~l 

•^s 

S= 

—  -  j  —  P  —  ^— 

—      — 

—  !*  P  *  — 

~~   \                    \" 

^  i                    P 

r       1    ^                   1                                       fl 

. 

j 

1 

P 

/k  P  fr  —  C  P  1 

—  g 

P  ^  — 

id  —  *  —  ^ 

—  ^  P  *- 

-J—  c  —  33 

«)           '-'* 

^— 

1  —  •» 

.—  ^ 

* 

•-»          3 

^-                *f 

-5—  s^-1 

1 

i/ 

—   1                    1- 

^  i         J 

S-fl 

—  B  —  SF 

^          ^ 

t*        ^ 

—  J  —  P  —  *  — 

KB!     P  —  • 

-* 

—  p  —  j- 

—  t  —  P  —  =-• 

^      «  — 

—  «  m  — 

H 


r      i 


-j— 


—  P  —  H 


P  —  H- 


^I:~p      ! 


au-p— *- 


"L    r 


32 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  XII  (b).          There  were  Two  Birds. 

Andante  moderate. 


E.  R. 


Introduction 

of  One-pulse 

rest. 


^^-^ 


There  were  two  birds,  sat  on    a  stone,  Fa,  la,  la,   la, 

Andante  moderate.  . 


)         4    J 


m/ 


atfct 


Fed. 


Ped. 


H F- 


do, 


One  flew  a -way,         then  there  was  one,  Fa,   la,  la,   la, 


fl  1? 
ff 


-g-ty- 

m    -g 


^t 


£ 


Ped'       * 

~  ~~ 


-t—        — i— 

de.  The         o-therflcw  af-ter        then  there  was  none,          Fa,  la,  la,  la, 


3rf±$ 


f o-+ F- 


de,  And  so  the  poor  stone  was  left  all  a-lonc,          Fa,  la,  la,  la,     de. 


Ped.          «  Ped. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION  33 


PART  I. 


STEP  I  (a).  Pulse  Regularity. 

THE  teacher  should  play  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  1,  while  the 
pupil  listens  carefully.  The  pupil  should  then  be  asked  to  give  his 
idea  of  the  character  of  the  tune,  such  questions  as  the  following  being 

The  PuDil's       Pu^  ^°  ass^s^  nmi  ^n  stating  what  he  had  observed  or 
idea  of  the      should  have  observed  :     "  Was  the  tune  joyful  or  sad  ? " 
"  Did  it  suggest  dancing  or  marching  ? "     "  Did  it  make 
him  want  to  move  his  hand  or  foot  ? "  etc. 

The  idea  of  movement  being  thus  brought  to  his  notice,  the  teacher 

should  play  a  few  bars  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  once  again,  and  ask 

him  to  make  a  movement  of  the  hand  or  foot  to  coincide 

t?  the^ime16  with  the  rliytlimic  swing  of  the  music.     It  should  then 
be  explained  that  in  making  some  such  movement  in 
correspondence  with  the  "  swing  "  of  the  tune,  we  are  keeping  time  to 
the  music. 

The  pupil  should  now  be  asked  thus  to  "  keep  time  "  by  clapping 
or  marching  to  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  as  it  is  played  once  again,  the 
teacher  playing  the  tune  with  well  denned  pulse  and  accent. 

Realizing  now  quite  clearly  that  there  is  movement 
of  w£e  m  mus^c'  and  that  it  is  possible  mentally  to  "  grasp  "  or 

"feel"  it,  and  keep  time  to  it,  the  pupil  should  try  to 
discover  why  it  is  that  he  can  walk,  march,  or  dance  to  it.  To  assist 
Effect  of  an  n*m  *n  nn(^m§  this  out  for  himself,  the  Rhythmic 
irregular  Exercise  should  be  played  with  an  irregular  pulse,  or, 

TllllSP 

as  we  say,  "  out  of  time,"  while  the  pupil  should  be 
asked  to  walk  or  march  to  it.  He  will  at  once  feel  that  marching 
to  music  played  in  this  manner  is  quite  impossible  ;  he  can  grasp 
nothing  in  it  that  will  correspond  to  the  steps  in  his  marching. 
Moreover,  he  will  observe  that  the  tune  has  now  become  almost 
unrecognizable. 

When  this  experiment  has  been  tried,  and  contrasted  with 
marching  to  music  played  in  the  proper  way,  it  will  not  be  difficult 


34  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

for  the  pupil  to  discover  that  the  movement  which  we  feel  to  be 
inherent  in  the  music  is,  and  must  be,  perfectly  regular  and  even. 

The  teacher  should  now  tell   the  pupil   that   this 
regular  movement,  or  throb,  is   called    the  Pulse    or 
Beat,    and    that    it   is    the    basis    or   foundation     of 
all  musical  effect. 

Practice  in  clapping  or  marching  to  strongly-marked  tunes  is  of 
the  utmost  importance  in  training  and  developing  the  pupil's  sense 
of,  and  sensitiveness  to,  pulse-regularity.  The  teacher  who  deals 
with  young  children  should  not  fail  to  cultivate  this  sense  assiduously 
by  giving  some  practice  of  this  kind  as  a  regular  part  of  every  lesson, 
particularly  in  connexion  with  work  in  class,  where  a  sort  of  communal 
interest  in  the  matter  in  hand,  of  the  utmost  value  to  both  teacher 
and  pupil,  is  at  once  aroused.* 


STEP  I  (b).    Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Doh  and  Soh. 

THE  song,  "  Little  Boy  Blue,"  should  be  played  straight  through  while 

the  pupil  listens,  t  The  teacher  should  then  ask  a  few  questions  as  to 
the  character  of  the  song,  similar  to  those  indicated  in 
^e  Previ°us  lesson.  This  should  be  followed  up  by 
teaching  the  pupil  to  sing  the  tune  by  rote.  In  order  to 

do  this,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  get  him  to  imitate  the  sounds 

exactly.     The  first  few  notes— 

-fcfc 


J      J 


Lit  -  tie    Boy     Blue, 

should  be  played  or  sung  slowly  by  the  teacher  and  immediately 
imitated  by  the  pupil ;  then  similarly  the  next  few  notes— 


|J 


come,     blow      up    your  horn, 


*  Musical  progress  is  impossible  unless  the  pupil  has  a  strong  and  highly 
developed  sense  of  pulse-regularity.  This  has  been  realized  to  the  full,  as  will  be  seen 
in  reference  to  the  Appendix,  by  the  author  of  the  system  of  Ehythmic  Movements 
carried  out  first  at  Streatham  Hill  High  School,  and  also  by  Monsieur  Jaques-Dalcroze 
in  his  excellent  system  of  Ehythmic  Gymnastics. 

t  In  this  and  succeeding  tunes  in  the  (b)  portion  of  every  Step  the  teacher  should 
sing  the  melody  and  play  the  accompaniment  at  the  same  time. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


35 


Afterwards,  these  two  small  sections  should  be  sung  consecutively  and 
repeated  until  known  by  heart,  the  rest  of  the  tune  being  taught  and 
learnt  in  the  same  way.* 

The  pupil  should  now  be  made  to  realize  clearly  that  he  has 

been  singing  two  different  sounds,  and  that  the  character  of  each  is  as 

distinct  from  the  other  as  that  of  two  different  persons. 

S?easoCunds°f  The  sounds  sunS  to  the  words'  ""Little  Boy  Blue," 
will  be  readily  felt  to  be  strong  and  firm,  and  those 
sung  to  "blow  up  your  horn"  bright  and  cheerful.  Further,  the 
effect  of  these  two  sounds  played  one  after  the  other  is  somewhat 
like  that  of  a  bugle  or  horn  call,  e.g.  : — 


H 


3 


3 


It  should  then  be  explained  that  these  two  different  sounds  are 
known  by  the  names  Doh  and   Soh,  the  strong,  firm  sound  being 
called  Doh  and  the  bright,  cheerful  one  Soh. 
The  names 

and  thair  '  ^n  exPressive  sign  of  the  hand,  thus— 
Hand-sigrns.  with  the  arm  extended  in  front  of  the 
body,  is  used  to  indicate  the  strong  Doh,  and  another  sign,  thus— 
to  indicate  Soh,  the  arm  being  similarly  extended 
in  front  of  the  body,  but  held  a  little  higher. 

These   names   Doh  and   Soh  are   called 
It 
5"  Sol-fa  syllables,  and  the  signs  of  the  hand, 

Hand-signs,  t 

The  pupil  should  now  try  to  discover  which  sounds  in  the  rest 
of  the  tune  can  be  associated  with  the  syllables  Doh  and  Soh 
respectively.  This  he  must  do  by  remembering  that  the  strong,  firm 
sounds  sung  to  "  Little  Boy  Blue  "  have  been  given  the  name  Doh, 
and  the  bright,  cheerful  sounds  sung  to  "blow  up  your  horn,"  the 
name  Soh.  He  should  then  sing  the  tune  with  the  words,  making 

*  In  schools  where  the  ideal  condition  of   having  both  a  singing-class  and  an 
aural-training  class  exists,  all  the  tunes  in  Step  (b)  of  this  part  might  quite  well  be  learnt 
in  the  singing-class  as  ordinary  songs.      This  would  enable  the  teacher  to  attend  to 
points  of  voice-production  and  interpretation  in  their  proper  places,  and  leave  more 
time  for  the  cultivation  of  the  rhythmic  sense  and  for  sight-reading  at  the  aural-training 
class.     Where  there  is  unfortunately  no  separate  singing-class,  the  teacher  must  see 
to  it  that  the  pupil  sings  the  little  songs  without  effort  or  strain.     Beauty  of  tone,  it 
should  be  remembered,  is  primarily  the  result  of  ease  and  freedom  of  production. 

*  These  ingenious  and  most  useful  signs  were  invented  by  the  late  John  Curwen. 


36  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

the  hand-signs  to  indicate  that  he  recognizes  the  sounds  he  is  singing. 
The  teacher  should  help  him  to  feel  the  character  of  each  sound, 
by  making  its  particular  hand-sign  at  the  same  time. 

The  whole  tune  should  now  be  sung  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables.    This 
is  called  "  Sol-faing  "  the  tune. 

The  teacher  should  next  explain  that  when  a  sound  is  made  it  is 

said  to  be  at  a  certain  Pitch,  sounds  of  acute  pitch  being  termed  high, 

those  of  grave  pitch  low.      For  instance,  the  strong, 

firm  sound    of   Doh    is  said   to  be  at  a  lower  pitch 

than  the  more  acute  and  cheerful  sound  Soh  above  it. 

This  conventional  idea  of  height  and  depth  as  applied 
to  pitch*  is  indicated  to  the  eye  by  the  diagram  of  Doh  and 
Soh  found  in  the  margin.  This  diagram  is  known  as  a 


soh 


doh 


Modulator. 


The  reverse  process  to  that  of  naming  sounds  when  they  are 
heard  should  now  be  dealt  with,  viz.,  the  mental  recalling  of  a 
sound  upon  seeing  the  symbol  or  sign  that  represents  it.  To  recall  a 
The  use  of  sound  in  this  way  implies  that  \ve  are  able  to  hear  it 
Sight-  inwardly,  i.e.,  are  able  to  imagine  it;  and  to  prove  that 

we  have  imagined  it  correctly  we  must  sing  it.  This 
not  only  tests  the  correctness  of  our  conception  of  the  sound,  but 
confirms  and  emphasizes  that  conception. 

The  name  Sight-singing  is  given  to  this  side  of  the  training  of 
the  ear,  and  it  is  no  less  important  in  the  development  of  aural 
perception  than  the  recognition  of  sounds  when  they  are  heard. 

The  teacher  should  sing  or  play  Doh  at  some  convenient  pitch, 

and  should  request  the  pupil  to  sing  Doh  or  Soh  as 

exercises          either  of  these  syllables  is  pointed  to  on  the  Modulator. 

in  Sight-          The    following    are    specimens    of    such    Modulator 

Exercises.     Ths  pitch   of  C,  D,  E,  or  F,   should   be 

used  for  Doh  in  turn  :— 


0)    doh  doh  (2)    doh    doh  doh 

-- — 
soh 
(3)    doh     doh  doh  doh 

*  See  remarks   as   to   this   on   page  19  of  "  Common  Sense  and  Singing,"  by 
John  Kennedy.     (Joseph  Williams,  Limited.) 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


37 


The  teacher  should  point  to  each  syllable  for  the  pupil  to  sing, 
and  should  make  him  "  lead  up  "  to  Soh,  resting  upon  it  slightly,  and 
after  a  short  break  lead  on  similarly  to  the  final  Doh,  giving  it  a  little 
more  weight  or  emphasis  than  was  given  to  the  Soh.  The  relative 
amount  of  weight  in  this  case  is  indicated  thus  —  and  =.* 

Each  sound  should  be  sung  as  the  result  of  its  own  mental  effect 

being  recalled.     If  the  pupil  fails  thus  to  recall  this  effect,  the  first 

(or  part  of  the  first)  phrase  of  the  tune,  "Little  Boy  Blue" 

Association       should  be  thought  of  or  sung.     For  instance,  supposing 

the  sound,  Soh,  has  been  for  the  moment  forgotten,  the 

thought  of  the  words,  "  blow  up  your  horn  "  should  at  once  recall  the 

sound  by  association,  f 


The   following    tests,    written   in   a   horizontal    line    as    shewn 

„     .,  below,    should   next    be    given    as    Sight-singing 

Further  Sig-ftt-  .' 

singing*  exercises,    exercises  : — 

Pitch  about  C,  D,  E  or  R 
(1)  d     d     d     d%    'ssssd       (2)dsdss'sddsd 

(3)d  s  s  d  .s  '  s  s  d  s  d   (4)dsdsss'sddssd 


(5)  d  d  d  s  s  s  d  d  s%  'dsdddsssdd  (6)ds8S_'dsdd 


*  In  giving  Modulator  exercises  the  teacher  should  endeavour  to  inculcate  from 
the  very  first  lesson  the  essential  idea  of  rhythm.  To  make  a  succession  of  sounds 
rhythmical,  there  must  be  breaks  in  their  continuity ;  and  further,  sounds  must  be 
felt  to  be  progressing  or  moving  towards  these  breaks  or  resting  places.  With  this 
idea  fixed  in  his  mind,  the  teacher  should  have  little  difficulty  in  making  rhythmical 
shapes  even  with  such  slight  material  as  the  two  sounds  already  considered.  The 
following  are  some  of  the  simple  forms  that  would  result  as  a  matter  of  course : — 


It  will  be  observed  that  when  a  phrase  splits  up  into  two  parts,  by  means  of  a  long 
note  in  the  middle,  the  sound  of  this  long  note  is  always  Soh,  whereas  the  sound  of 
the  long  note  at  the  end  is  always  Doh.  (See  page  42.)  The  commas  indicate 
breathing-places. 

t  This  valuable  principle  of  the  association  of  a  particular  sound  or  interval  with 
a  particular  tune  should  be  made  much  of  by  the  teacher  in  dealing  with  the  question 
of  pitch,  especially  when  the  pupil's  ear  is  dull  or  undeveloped. 


38  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

These  exercises  should  be  pointed  rhythmically  (as  shewn  in  con- 
nexion with  the  Modulator  exercises  on  page  36),  appropriately  thus : — 
Ex.  1.  Ex.  6. 


The  fundamental  idea  of  rhthym  alluded  to  above  (page  37, 
foot-note),  viz.,  that  of  movement  towards  a  point  of  rest,  is  thus  again 
forcibly  illustrated.  The  authors  deprecate  most  strongly  the 
unrhythmical  way  in  which  Sight- singing  studies  are  often  presented, 
and  they  feel  that  reform  in  this,  as  well  as  in  the  pointing  of 
Modulator  exercises,  is  urgently  needed  in  elementary  teaching. 

The  Modulator  tests,  as  well  as  those  just  given,  should  now 

be  sung  to  the  syllable  Lah.      This  is  a  most  useful 

to  Lah.  exercise,    as    it    compels    the    pupil    to    imagine    the 

character  of  the  sound  before  singing  it,  without  the 

help  which  comes  from  the  singing  of  the  Sol-fa  syllables. 


The  pupil  should  prepare  the  following  as  homework,  in  readiness 

Preparation    for  the  following  lesson  :- 

for  the  next       (1)  Draw  the  Modulator  of  Doh,  Soh,  found  in  the 

1  ^QQOTl 

margin  on  page  36,  and  sing  the  tune,  "Little 
Boy  Blue,"  pointing  to  the  special  syllable  that  indicates 
each  sound  as  it  is  sung. 

(2)  Sing  the  tune  to  the  words,  making  the  hand-signs  (instead 

of  pointing  to  the  syllables)  to  indicate  each  sound. 

(3)  Sing  the  tune  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables,  pointing  to  them 

on  the  Modulator. 


STEP  II  (a).          Pulse  and  Accent.— Duple  Time. 

THE  teacher  should  play  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  2,  while  the 
pupil   listens   for  the   pulse   or  beat.      As   soon   as  this  has   been 
grasped,  a  movement  of  the  hand  should  be  made  to  indicate  it. 
Pupil's  idea  The  teacher  should  now  ask  the  pupil  to  give  his 

or  the  tune,  i^eas  as  ^o  ^ne  character  of  the  tune  (see  directions  on 
page  33),  and  also  to  state  whether  all  the  pulses  seem  alike  as 
regards  their  strength  and  weight,  or  not.  A  few  bars  of  the  tune 
should  then  be  played  once  more  with  a  well-defined  accent  on 
the  first  beat  of  each  bar,  and  the  pupil  requested  to  tap  loudly  (or  to 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  39 

stamp,  or  tread  heavily,  if  marching)  at  the  pulses  that  he  thinks  are 
stronger  than  the  others. 

When  this  idea  of  accent  has  been  discovered  and  clearly  felt, 

the  tune  should  be  played  again  and  the  pupil  directed  to  make  a 

downward  movement  of  the  arm  and  hand  to  indicate 

Accent.  £ne  strong  pulse,  and  a  corresponding  upward  movement 


up 
2 


for  the  weak  pulse —  |  ^       It  should   then  be   explained   that  this 

i  '    is  called  " Beating  Time"  and  it  should  be 

down 

pointed  out  how  emphatically  the  strong  pulses  impress  themselves 
upon  the  mind,  with  the  result  that  it  "  grips  "  them  and  regards  them 
as  the  principal  ones  in  the  series,  or  group,  of  pulses.  Furthermore, 
the  strong  pulses,  occurring  as  they  do  at  regular  intervals,  produce 
similar  groups  of  pulses  in  regular  sequence,  each  group  being  called 
a  bar  or  measure. 

When  musical  sounds  are  thus  grouped  into  sets  by  means  of 
a  regularly  recurring  strong  pulse,  they  are  said  to  be  in  a  certain 

Time,  the  particular  time  being  determined  by  the 
Explanation  number  of  pulses,  from  one  strong  pulse  up  to  (but  not 

including)  the  next  strong  pulse.*  For  example,  in  the 
Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  2,  there  are  two  pulses  (counting  in  this 
way)  from  one  strong  accent  to  the  next,  and  when  the  pulses  are 
thus  arranged  in  groups  of  two,  the  time  is  said  to  be  Duple. 

The  teacher  should  then  tell  the  pupil  that  the  strong  pulse  is 
generally  known  as  the  accented  pulse,  or  accented  beat.     Further,  it 

should  be  explained  that  this  regular  grouping  of  pulses 
fop6  accent1  ^  ^v  means  °f  accent  is  at  the  root  of  all  intelligibility  in 

music,  and  in  order  to  demonstrate  this  fact,  the  pupil 
should  be  asked  to  listen  to  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  2,  played 
with  no  accents  at  all.  The  tune  will,  of  course,  at  once  be  felt 

to  lose  all  its  clearness,  its  definiteness  and  its  life, 
no  Accents  ^  becomes  vague,  loose  and  meaningless.  The  mind 

has  nothing  to  grasp  or  take  hold  of,  simply  because 
there  is  no  intelligible  grouping  of  the  pulses  into  some  kind  of 
order  or  definite  shape. 

*  The  teacher  should,  however,  carefully  note  that  the  sound  occurring  on  the 
strong  pulse  of  each  bar  is  most  frequently  to  be  felt  as  a  point  to  which  the  sounds 
on  the  preceding  weaker  pulse  (or  pulses)  naturally  tend.  (See  groupings  in  first 
musical  example  on  page  40.) 


40  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

The  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  used  as  a  test  for  both 
E  t  t  '  Pitch  Bad  Accent.  After  establishing  the  key  and  fixing 
Pitch  and  the  sound  of  Doh  firmly  in  the  pupil's  mind,  the  teacher 
Accent.  should  play  the  melody  in  small  sections  of  two  notes, 


fe  —  \— 

^m 

-i  —  J- 

T1^ 

1  —  r- 

thus:—       /fa r-  EE      J     — r~  =1=1  etc., 


asking  the  pupil  to  give  their  Sol-fa  names  and  afterwards  to  write 
these  names  down.     A  pause  should  be  made  at  the  end  of  each 
section  in  order  to  give  him  time  to  write  down  the  sounds  he  has  heard 
When  this  has  been  done,  the  pupil  should  sing  exactly  what  he  has 
written,  as  a  series  of  consecutive  sounds  without  accents,  thus  :— 

ddsdsdsddddddsss,  etc. 

The  teacher  should  now  play  or  sing  the  tune  slowly,  with 
well-marked  accents,  and  then  ask  the  pupil  to  put  crosses  under  the 
syllables  which  his  ear  tells  him  are  accented,  e.g.  :— 

ddsdsdsd    etc. 
x  x  x  x 

He  should  then  shew  him  that  there  are  certain  resting-places 

in  the  course  of  the  tune,  and  that  it  splits  up  into  four 

rhythmical  periods,  or  phrases.     He  should  then  put  a 

slur  or  bracket  over  each  of  these  to  make  this  clear  to  the  eye,  e.g. : — 


dsdsd'ddddd 
x     x     x     x     x 


d  s  d  s  d  '  d  d  s  s  s 
x     x     x     x     x 

The  tune  should  then  be  sung  by  the  pupil,  this  time  with  careful 
observance  of  the  accents  and  phrasing.  The  teacher  should  remind 
him  that  the  notes  of  each  phrase  must  be  felt  as  leading  to,  or 
progressing  towards  its  final  note.*  (See  note  to  Step  I  (b).)  In  order 
to  obtain  the  requisite  break  at  the  end  of  each  of  these  divisions,  a 
breath  should  be  taken  (as  indicated  by  the  comma),  and  this  final 
note  slightly  shortened,  approximately  as  at  (a)  in  the  following 

*  The  idea  of  musical  sounds  progressing  towards  certain  landmarks  was 
first  systematically  set  forth  as  the  basis  of  all  rhythmic  performance  by  Mr.  Tobias 
Matthay.  The  knowledge  and  recognition  of  this  simple  law  not  only  produces 
clear  rhythmic  thinking,  and  consequently  clear  and  definite  expression,  but  also 
assists  in  developing  a  perfect  control  of  rhythmic  movement. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  41 

example.     On  no  account  must  the  commencement  of  the  succeeding 
phrase  be  delayed  beyond  the  moment  at  which  it  is  due :— 


i 


3S=t 


^ 


etc. 


The  pupil  must  be  most  careful  to  take  breath  only  at  these  breaks* 

Tunes  in  Duple   time   should  be  frequently  played  to  tht 
pupil  between  his  lessons,  in  order  that  his  perception 
Preparation,     of  pulse   and   accent  may   be  developed.     He  should 
clap,  walk,  or  beat  time,  as  the  music  is  played  to  him. 

He   should  also   sing   the   Rhythmic   Exercise   frequently 
observing  the  accents  and  rhythmic  divisions,  taking  care 
to  lead  up  to  the  last  note  in  each  of  these  divisions,  as 
indicated  above. 


STEP  II  (b).       Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Upper  Doh. 

THE  song,  "  Baa,  baa,  Black  Sheep,"  should  first  be  played  straight 
through   while    the   pupil    listens,    as   in   Step   I  (b). 

theTtunf          Questions  on  the  character  and  time  of  the  piece  should 
then  be  asked,  the  pupil  afterwards  learning  the  tune 

by  rote,  in  the  same  way  as  in  the  case  of  "  Little  Boy  Blue." 

When  the  tune  can  be  sung  sufficiently  well,  the  pupil  should  be 

requested  to  give  the  Sol-fa  names  of  the  sounds  of  the  first  eight 

bars.      On  arriving  at  the  ninth  bar,  he  should  be  told 
Naming-  the 
sounds.  to  listen  carefully,  and  to  say  whether  he  hears  any 


new  sound  or  not.      When  this  new  sound —  fa     |»     ~g     g — :etc. 

«7      One        for     the 

Character  of    nas  ^een  recOgnized,  it  should  be  compared  with  the 
Doh   and   Soh   already  learnt,   and    its    similarity   to 
Doh  pointed  out.f 

When  this  has  been  thoroughly  realized,  the  teacher  should  say 
that  this  sound  which  is  so  like  Doh,  is  really  a  replica  or  a  repetition 

*  In  this  tune  we  see  the  most  usual  type  of  phrase,  viz.,  that  consisting  of  four 
bars.  See  Chapters  III  and  IV  of  "  Form  in  Music."  (Stewart  Macpherson.) 

f  This  similarity  is  well  shewn  by  comparing  the  speaking  voice  of  a  woman 
with  that  of  a  man.  The  pupil  may  not  have  realized  that  the  man  speaks  at  the 
pitch  of  one  Doh,  while  tb«  child  or  woman  speaks  at  the  pitch  of  the  Doh  above, 
i.e.,  an  octave  above. 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


of  it  at  a  higher  pitch.    The  name  given  to  it,  therefore,  is  also  Doh  ; 
Upper  Doh       ^ufc  ^  *s  distinguished  from  the  Doh  already  learnt  by 


with  its 
Hand-sign. 


being  called  Upper  Doh  (written  thus,  Doh'  or  d1),  the 
hand-sign  being  the  same  as  for  Doh,  with  the  difference 
that  the  hand  is  held  higher,  a,bout  on  a  level  with  the  head. 

The  pupil  should  now  name  the  sounds  of  the  second  part  of  the 
tune  as  it  is  played,  making  the  hand-signs  as  he  sings  the  Sol-fa 
syllables,  as  suggested  in  Step  I  (b).  The  complete  tune  should  then 
be  sung  (i)  to  the  words,  the  pupil  and  the  teacher  making  the  hand- 
signs  to  indicate  the  various  sounds ;  (ii)  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables 
instead  of  the  words. 

After  this,  the  pupil  should  be  shewn  that  the  tune  contains 
four  phrases,  each  of  these  corresponding  to  a  line  of  the 
Analogy  words  ;  further,  that  there  is  no  feeling  of  conclusion 

with  poetic  or  finality  at  the  end  of  any  of  these  phrases,  except 
construction.  the  lasfc  From  thig  he  win  realize  that  music  is 

analogous  to  poetry  in  that  it  rhymes ;  that  Doh  is  a  sound  which 
produces  an  effect  of  finality,  or  state  of  complete  rest,  more  especially 
if  it  comes  at  the  end  of  a  phrase  and  upon  an  accented  beat ;  that  Soh 
is  a  sound  which  produces  a  feeling  of  expectancy,  a  desire  for 
something  more  to  follow,  but  which  at  the  same  time  has  enough 
of  the  element  of  rest  in  it  to  make  a  satisfactory  finish  for  the  end  of 
a  phrase,  although  not  (as  a  rule)  for  the  end  of  the  piece ;  and  finally, 
that  the  mental  effect  of  both  Doh  and  Soh  is  heightened  by  the 
position  in  which  they  are  placed  in  the  time-scheme  of  the  piece — 
in  other  words,  by  their  position  in  the  phrase. 

Thus  we  feel  Doh  to  be  a  sort  of  "  Central "  or  "  Home  "  sound, 
Doh  a  "Central"  because  there  is  always  a  feeling  of  incompleteness 
or  "  Home  "  sound.  untji  we  return  to  it. 

The  position  of  upper  Doh  should  now  be  shewn  as  on  the 
Sight-reading-  Modulator  found  in  the  margin,  and  the  following 
tests.  an(j  similar  tests  should  be  pointed  on  this 

Modulator  for  the  pupil  to  sing.     (See  Step  I  (b),  page  36.) 


doh1 
soh 


doh 


(1)    doh 


(2) 


doh1 
soh          soh 


doh  doh 


doh 


doh'V/doh1    X        /     doh1 

soh          soh\y  soh  soh 

doh  doh 


doh'\     ^ /     doh 

soh  son\^ysoh 
doh  doh 


doh 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 

The  following  Sight-singing  exercises  written  in  a  horizontal  line 
should  also  be  sung ;  first  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables,  and  then  to  the 
syllable  La/i  throughout.  The  pitch  of  Doh  should  not  be  in  any 
case  higher  than  E  :— 

(1)    d      s      s      d1     s 


(2)    s    d   d1    s    d   d1    s    d    s 


(3)    d1     s     d1     s     d 


(4)    d1     d     s     s     d'    ^ 


s    •dsd'tttdd 


(5)    d      s      d1     ds.    '    8"«      d" 

The  pupil  should  observe,  in  the  above  exercises,  how  much  stronger  and  how 
much  more  restful  the  effect  of  the  Doh  sound  is  when  it  comes  on  an 
accented  beat  at  the  end  of  a  phrase  or  sentence,  and  also  how  much 
brighter  and  stronger  the  sound  Soh  is  when  it  occurs  similarly  on  an 
accent  at  the  end  of  a  phrase. 


(1)  Sing  the  tune  "  Baa,  baa,  Black  Sheep  "  from  memory, 
Preparation      pointing  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  on  the  Modulator. 

(2)  Sol-fa    the    tune,    making    the    hand-signs,    or 
pointing  on  the  Modulator. 
(3)  Construct  a  few  phrases  upon  the  sounds  learnt.* 


STEP  III  (a).     Pulse  and  Accent.— Triple  Time. 

THE  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  3,  should  be  played  straight  through 
while  the  pupil  listens.  Questions  on  the  tune,  relating  to 

its  character  should  then,  as  before,  be  asked,  the 
the*  tun*!'  t0  teacner  bearing  in  mind  that  it  is  the  pupil's  idea  of 

the  tune  that  he  must  always  endeavour  to  elicit; 
therefore,  whatever  leading  questions  are  put  to  him  should  be 
directed  entirely  to  this  object. 

*  The  pupil  should  begin  by  writing  four  sounds,  making  two  sounds  balance, 
or  rhyme  with,  two  others,  e.g. : —  d  £  '  d  d;  then  six  should  be  taken 

d    s    s  '    d1   s    d;  then  eight,  d    s    d1   s  '    s    d1   s    d,  and  so  on. 

At  present  he  should  make  the  first  phrase  always  end  on  Soh,  and  the  second 
on  Doh,  and  further  should  always  make  the  last  note  of  each  phrase  come  on  an 
accent.  This  is  easily  done  by  repeating  any  note  if  necessary.  (See  page  37  with 
reference  to  the  importance  of  this.) 

The  teacher  should  insist  that  the  pupil  should  sing  every  phrase  he  writes,  in 
order  that  it  may  be  quite  certain  that  he  realizes  the  sound  of  what  he  has  written. 
His  early  efforts  should  be  encouragingly,  but  judiciously,  criticized. 


44  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

It  cannot  be  too  carefully  remembered  that  it  matters  little  if  the 
idea  conveyed  by  the  pupil's  answer  is  different  from  the  teacher's 
own ;  any  rigid  insistence  on  words  is  not  only  of  no  value,  but  is 
fatal  to  the  exercise  of  the  child's  imagination.  Any  answer  which 
shews  thought,  even  if  it  be  not  altogether  accurate,  should  be 
accepted,  at  any  rate  for  the  moment.  It  is  usually  easy  for  a  careful 
and  sympathetic  teacher  to  bring  such  an  answer  more  into  line  with 
what  he  considers  the  correct  description  of  the  music,  and  the  pupil 
is  encouraged,  instead  of  having  his  attempts  at  self-expression 
checked  and  hampered. 

The  pupil  should  now  be  asked  to  "keep  time"  to  the  tune  by 

clapping  or  marching.      The  accented  pulse  should  be  listened  for, 

and  a  loud  clap  made  to  indicate  it.     The  pupil  should 

the^cents  ^ien  ^e  as^e(^  now  manv  pulses  there  are  from  one 
accented  pulse  to  the  next ;  remembering  of  course 

what  was  said  in  Step  II  as  to  beginning  the  counting  upon  the 

accent  and  continuing  up  to  (but  not  including)  the  next  accent. 

Each  accent  thus  forms  the  commencement  of  a  new  group  of  pulses. 
It  will  now  be  discovered  that  there  are  three  pulses  in  each 

measure  or  bar,  and  it  should  be  explained  that  this  kind  of 
grouping,  viz.,  that  formed  by  accenting  one  pulse  in 
every  three,  is  called  Triple  Time.  The  method  of 

beating  Triple  Time  should  then  be  shewn,  viz.  :— 

Method  of        a  downward  movement  of  the  hand  and 

beating-  arm   to   indicate  the  first  or  accented 

ie*     beat;  another  movement,  this  time  to 

the  right,  to  indicate  the  second ;   and  an  upward  movement  for  the 

third  or  last  beat  of  each  bar. 

When  the  pupil  can  make  these  movements  easily,  the  teacher 

Beating-  time   should  play  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  3,  once  again, 

to  the  tune.     whiie  the  pupii  beats  the  time. 


The  teacher  should  now  play  the  melody  only  of  this  Rhythmic 
Exercise  and  request  the  pupil  to  write  down  the  Sol-fa  names  of 

these   sounds.      The  method  of  procedure   should  be 
Ear  tests 

exactly  as  in  Step  II  (a),  viz.,  that  a  few  notes  should 

be  played  at  a  time,  named  by  the  pupil,  and  then  written  down ; 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  45 

the  pupil  then  singing  what  he  has  written,  afterwards  putting 
crosses  under  the  accented  syllables,  as  the  teacher  plays  or  sings  the 
tune  once  more,  e.g. : — 


s     d     d     8     d     d     s     d     dds's     d's      s     d'ssd'd1    cFis  etc. 

X  X  XXX  XXX 

The  phrasing  of  the  tune  should  now  be  aimed  at  by  the 
discovery  of  the  "  resting "  or  "  breathing  "  places  ;  and  the  pupil 
should  then  be  directed  to  add  slurs  over  the  syllables  of  each  phrase, 
as  in  Step  II  (a).  Finally,  the  tune  should  be  sung  again,  with  due 
regard  both  to  accent  and  to  phrasing.  The  teacher  should  point 
out  how  each  phrase  except  the  last,  ends  on  Soli,  and  so  remind  the 
pupil  of  the  substance  of  the  previous  lesson. 


The  two  Rhythmic  Exercises  should  be  sung  as  often  as 
possible  as  studies  in  accent  and  phrasing.  The  two 
Preparation.  Nursery  Rhymes  already  learnt  should  also  be  sung 
and  pointed  on  the  Modulator  from  time  to  time. 
These  tunes  should  not  be  forgotten,  but  should  be 
considered  as  studies  in  memory-singing. 


STEP  III  (b).      Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Me. 

THE  teacher  should  play  the  song,  "Hush-a-by,  Baby,"  and  then 
ask  the  pupil  to  say  what  time  it  is  in,*  and  to  give  his  ideas  as 
to  its  character.  He  should  also  beat  time  while  the  song  is  being 
played  again. 

After  this,  both  words  and  music  should  be  learnt  from 
Learning:  memory  in  the  manner  described  in  the  previous 
Steps. 

The  pupil  should  now  name  the  sounds  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables — 

the  teacher  first  playing —  ~j?rfr  i'"j  "i  i  K  and  the  pupil  singing 
Naming  the  77^  _J^-J_J-_J^J_  tne  names,  d-d-d  d  d 

sounds.  directly  after.     Then  the  teacher  should  ask  the  pupil 

*  In  this  tune  the  pupil  should  be  made  to  feel  merely  that  the  time  is  Duple  ; 
any  reference  to  the  fact  that  it  is  Compound  Duple  is  unnecessary  and  undesirable  at 
this  stage. 

There  is  on  page  105  an  alternative  tune  in  Triple  Time  introducing  Me ;  this  may 
be  used  instead  of  "  Hush-a-by,  Baby,"  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


to  listen  very  carefully  to  the  next  few  notes—    J) ,  l>      f  H   !     I    - 
to  try  and  discover  the  difference  between  them  g*= 
and  the  bright  sounds  of  Soh.     When  this  has  been  realized,  and  the 
calm,  peaceful  character  of  the  new  sound  felt,  the  name  Me,  with  the 

Me  with  its       ,       j    .       ,, 
Hand-sign.       hand-sign,  thus- 


should  be  given  to 

represent  it,  the  hand  being  held  in  front  of  the  body,  pointing  forwards. 
The  teacher  should  now  play  the  next  few  notes  quite  slowly, 
emphasizing  the  new  sound,  the  pupil  singing  the  Sol-fa  names 
immediately  after,  representing  them  by  the  hand -signs.  The  rest  of 
the  tune  should  be  taken  in  the  same  manner,  and  the  whole  sung 
to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  in  place  of  the  words.  The  tune  should  also 
be  sung  to  the  words  while  the  pupil  makes  the  hand-signs  to 
represent  the  sounds  he  is  singing. 


doh' 


soh 


me 
doh 


The  position  of  Me  should  be  shewn  on  the  Modulator 
Sig-ht-sing-ing-  as  in  the  margin,  when  the  tune,   "Hush-a-by, 
Baby,"   and  the  following  exercises  should  be 


pointed  on  it  for  the  pupil  to  sing  :— 


tests. 


(1)    doh 


soh     '    soh 


soh 


doh 
'soh  soh\_/soh          soh      soh  \f  soh 

me  me          me 


(3)     doh  doh 


doh 


me 


doh 


The  following  and  similar  Sight-singing  tests  should  next 
be  given  to  the  pupil,  who  should  sing  them  first  to  the  Sol-fa 
syllables,  and  afterwards  to  Lah : — 


(1)  d     a      s      s      n      n~*s 

(2)  d      n      s      s      n      s      £ 
(3)dddssnddns 


(4)    s     d     n     s    d1    n    s     d    s    n    s    '   B~ 


'    d^ 


s      n 


n      d 


s     n     s     d1    d     s     rr  d 


dndsnsd'd 


(5)     d     n     d     d1     d 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  47 

(1)  The   tune   should    be    pointed    from    memory   on    the 

Modulator,  the  pupil  using  either  the  words  or  the 
Preparation.     Q 

bol-ia  syllables. 

(2)  Phrases   should    be   constructed   introducing   the   new 

sound.     (See  page  43.) 

(3)  Impromptu  tunes  should  be  pointed  on  the  Modulator, 

similar  to  the  Sight-singing  tests  given  above. 


STEP  IV  (a).     Pulse  and  Accent— Quadruple  Time. 

THE    Rhythmic    Exercise,    No.    4,  having    been    played,    and    the 

character  of  the  tune  having  been  described  by  the  pupil,  the  teacher 

should  request  him  to  keep  time  by  clapping  or  marching, 

the^unlf         an(^   to  c^aP  l°u(ily  or  tread  heavily  at  the  accented 

pulses,  as  in  previous   lessons.      He   should   then  be 

asked  to  state  how  many  pulses  there  are  from   one  strong  beat 

to  the  next  (i.e.,  how  many  beats  in  a   bar).      When  the   answer 

"  four  "  has  been  given,  the  teacher  should  say  that  this  particular 

kind   of  pulse-grouping    produces   what  is  known  as 

TimeU  Quadruple   Time,  and  also   should    shew  the   method 

of  beating  it,  viz.,  a  downward  movement  of  the  hand 

and  arm  for  the  first  beat,  one  to  the  left  for  the  second,  one  to 

the  right  for  the  third,  and  an   upward   movement   for  the  fourth 

Method  of 

Quadruple        ^ea^  °f  eacn  bar,  thus— 
Time. 

When  the  pupil  can  make  these  movements  easily,  he  should 
beat  time  to  the  tune. 


The  melody  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  sung  or 
played  by  the  teacher,  the  pupil  naming  the  sounds  to  the  Sol-fa 

syllables  and  writing  them  in  his  book.  The  melody 
iif^itch.  should,  as  in  Steps  II  and  III,  be  dictated  in 

small  fragments,  of  either  two  or  four  notes,  as  indicated 
by  the  brackets  in  the  following  example  : — 


1  5  I    i  II  I     5 


[  II      II  il      I  ,1  7  I     i I      I 

Jlj  J  J  JIJ  J  J  JIJ  j  J  Jg 


48  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPOX 

and  when  the  whole  tune  has  been  written  down,  thus — 

sdndnsns'sdndnndri'  etc. 
the  pupil  should  sing  it  from  his  own  copy,  without  accents. 

The  teacher  should  then  play  or  sing  the  melody  again  with  the 
requisite  accentuation  and  ask  him  to  follow  what  is  being  sung, 
telling  him  this  time  to  put  crosses  under  the  accented 
in  Accent  syllables ;  the  melody  should  then  be  divided  into 
and  Time.  sections  as  below.  When  this  has  been  done,  he 
should  be  requested  to  sing  the  tune  again  with  the  proper  accents 
and  phrasing  :— 

X  A X  /  A          N 

sdndnsns^sdndindn    etc.* 
xx  xx 

It  should  now  be  explained  that  this  method  of  placing  a  cross 
under  the  accented  syllables  is  not  the  most  effective  means  of  making 

clear  to  the  eye  the  length  of  the  various  bars  or 
Bar-fines  measures,  and  that  it  is  customary  instead  for  an 

upright  line  to  be  drawn  immediately  be/ore  each 
accented  syllable.  These  upright  lines  are  called  bar-lines  and 
effectively  space  out  the  music  into  its  respective  bars  or  measures. 
The  pupil  should  now  add  a  bar-line  before  each  accented  syllable  of 
the  tune  he  has  written  down,  deleting  the  crosses,  thus  :— 


1 

8 

d     n      d     n 

"1,1 

s      n      •      • 

d     n     d     n 

n      d      n 

The  pupil  will  probably  have  realized,  in  the  three  Rhythmic 
Exercises  which  he  has  been  studying,  that  every  sound  is  exactly  of 

the  value  of  one  pulse  or  beat.  It  should  then  be 
Time-names'  explamed  that  the  duration  of  a  sound  may  be  described 

and  recognized  by  a  special  name,  just  as  the  pitch  of 
a  sound  is.  The  name  Taa  (known  as  a  Duration-  or  Time-name)f 

*  It  should  be  noticed  that  the  climax  of  each  phrase  in  the  above  exercise  does 
not  occur  on  its  last  note ;  the  sounds  lead  up  to  the  strong  accent  on  the  6th  note 
and  then  fall  away  from  it  to  the  final  one,  thus : — 


This  will  be  more  fully  commented  upon  later  with  reference  to  "  feminine  endings.' 

t  These  ingenious  Time-names,  the  link  between  sound  and  notation,  were  the 
invention  of  a  French  writer  named  Aim6  Paris.  The  pronunciation  of  the  aa  in  Taa 
is  that  of  the  a  in  "  father." 


MDS1CAL    APPRECIATION.  49 

is  thus  always  associated  with  a  sound  that  lasts  for  one  beat,  and 
no  more. 

In  order  to  impress  this  fact,  the  teacher  should  first  of  all  beat 
silently  a  bar  or  two  of  quadruple  time,  and  then  play  or  sing  the  first 


two  bars  of  the  tune,  thus  :—  J     J     J=j==  _^     J 


After  having  done  this,  he  should  direct  the  pupil  to  beat  time 
and  to  sing  these  two-bar  sections  to  the  Time-names  corresponding 
to  the  sounds  he  has  heard.  These  Time-names  should  then  be 
written  down  and  the  bar-lines  and  phrasing-marks  added,  thus  : — 


taa 


taa  taa  taa  taa 


taa  taa  taa 


Each  phrase  should  be  taken  similarly,  and  when  the  Time- 
names  of  the  whole  of  the  exercise  have  been  written  down,  the  pupil 
should  march  and  beat  time,  singing  the  Time-names  instead  of  the 
Sol-fa  syllables. 

The  usual  notational  sign  to  represent  the  duration  of  a  Taa  (or 
Notation  one-pulse  sound)  viz.,  J  or  f,  should  then  be  shewn. 

for  Taa  This  sign  (called  a  crotchet)  should  be  written  by 

the  pupil  upon  a  horizontal  line  under  the  Time-name,  thus  : — 

j  taa  (  taa  taa  taa  taa  }  taa  taa  taa 

I  etc. 

r  I  r  r  r  r  I  r  r~r 

the  Time-name  and  its  special  notational  sign  thus  becoming  associated 
from  the  very  first. 

N.B. — The  horizontal  line  should  be  written  first,  and  then  the  crotchets,  the 
bar-lines  afterwards  being  inserted.  The  mere  practice  of  writing  the 
crotchets  is  of  great  value  to  the  young  pupil,  as  it  fixes  the  sign  in  his 
memory. 


(1)  Tunes  in  Duple,  Triple,  and  Quadruple  Time  should  be 

frequently  played  to  the  pupil,  in  order  that  he  may 
have  practice  in  Time -recognition,  and  in  beating. 

(2)  "Little    Boy   Blue,"    "  Baa,   baa,   Black    Sheep,"   and 

"Hush-a-by,  Baby"  should  be  sung  frequently,  some- 
times to  the  Sol-fa  names  and  sometimes  to  the  words. 


50 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  IV  (b).    Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Te. 

THE  song,  "Who  killed  Cock  Robin?"  should  be  played  through, 
the  pupil  being  asked  to  name  its  time  and  to  describe  the  genera, 
character  of  the  music,  as  it  appeals  to  his  imagination.  The  words 
Learning1  the  and  music  should  then  be  learnt  from  memory  in 
tune«  the  manner  that  has  been  rendered  familiar  in  the 

case  of  previous  lessons. 

The  pupil  should  now  apply  the  Sol-fa  syllables  to  the  various 
sounds,  the  teacher  playing  or  singing  the  first  five  notes  to  Lah,  the 
pupil  naming  them,  thus  : —  d  n  &  d1  d1 .  The  teacher 
should  then  direct  him  to  listen  carefully,  in  order  to 
discover  if  in  the  next  few  notes  that  are  played  he  can 
hear  any  other  sound  besides  the  four  (d  n  &  d1)  that  he  already 

knows : — 


sounds* 


When  he  has  realized  the  new  sound  on  the  second  beat  of  the 
third  bar  of  the  tune,  its  peculiar  mental  effect  should  be  impressed 
upon  his  mind.  If  the  teacher  sings  or  plays  the  following  passage : — 

(bar  2)  (bar  3)          ^ 


pausing  on  the  C  natural,  it  should  be  quite  easy  for  the  pupil  to 
feel  the  keen,  piercing  character  of  this  particular  sound,  its 
restlessness,  and  its  strong  desire  for  Doh  to  follow  it.* 


The  name   Te   should  be  given  to  the  new  sound, 

„,  -,      and  the  hand  -sign  associated  with  it,  viz  :  — 

Tne  name  Te 


and  its 
Hand-sigrn. 


the 


index  -finger    pointing    upwards   with 
palm    of   the    hand    turned    towards 

the  body,  shewn  thus  :— 


*  It  should  be  carefully  demonstrated  by  example  how  much  the  strong,  restful 
effect  of  Doh  is  emphasized  by  being  preceded  by  Te,  more  especially  if  Doh  comes 
upon  the  stronger  accent  of  the  two,  and  near  the  end  of  a  phrase  or  other  musical 
period,  e.g.: — 


^ 


f 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


51 


When  the  remaining  sounds  of  the  tune  have  been  named,  the 
pupil  should  sing  the  whole  of  it  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables, 
making  the  hand-signs  at  the  same  time.  It  should 

Sol-faing  afterwards  be  sung  to  Lah,  and  also  to  the  words,  the 
hand-signs  being  made  to  indicate  that  the  pitch  of 

each  sound  is  clearly  realized  as  it  is  sung. 


doh1 
te 

soh 
me 

• 

doh 


The  Modulator  should  be  drawn  as  in  the  margin, 
shewing  the  position  of  Te  just  below  the  upper  Doh,  and  the 
teacher  should  point  the  tune  upon  it.  The 
following  and  similar  tests  should  also  be  pointed 
for  the  pupil  to  sing.  (Each  exercise  should  be 
sung  at  a  different  pitch,  Doh  not  higher  than  E  or  F.) 


doh1 


Sight- 
singing. 


(1)     doh 


(2)    soh 


doh1 


me 


doh 


N.B. — Exercise  2  above  will  shew  that  Te  can  sometimes  be  used  instead  of 
Soh  as  a  sound  to  rest  upon  in  the  course  of  an  exercise ;  *  this  fact  should  be 
impressed  upon  the  pupil's  notice. 


The  tests  given  below  should  be  sung  as  before,  both  to  the 

Further  Sol-fa  syllables  and  to  Lah,  great  care  being  taken  by 

Sight-singing  the  teacher  to  insist  upon  pure  and   true   intonation. 

es  s*  The  fact  of  the  sounds  moving  towards  their  points  of 

*  The  teacher  will,  of  course,  realize  that  the  fact  of  Te  being  possible  as  the  last 
note  of  any  announcing  phrase,  is  accounted  for  by  its  position  as  one  of  the  three 
sounds  of  the  Dominant  Triad — the  final  chord  in  an  Imperfect  (or  Half) 
Cadence,  e.g.: —  

&  i        -ii 


52 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


support  or  repose  should  be   kept  prominently  before   the   pupil's 
mind  : — 


(1)  d  n   s   n   s 


'  1 


(2)  d  n   s   d1  d1  n  £  '  sd'  s   n 


(3)  n      d      n      s      d'     d1 

(4)  s      t     d1     d     n     s 


'  1 


d1  s   s  n 


sn  d1 


(5)  d1  t  d1  n  s  n  ^  '  s   t  d1  n  s 


(6)  d1  d1  t  t  s  s  i  '  d'  d1  t  t  d1  s  1 

Other  tests  of  a  similar  nature  should  be  written  for  him  to  sing,  first 
to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  and  afterwards  to  Lah. 

For  the  present  it  is  very  desirable  that  the  exercises  should 
invariably  be  constructed  upon  the  above  plan,  viz.,  that  of  an 
announcing  phrase  followed  by  a  responsive  one.  The  last  sound  oj 
each  phrase  should,  for  the  present,  always  fall  upon  a  strong  accent. 


PPOD&P&tiOD 


(1)  The  pupil  should  prepare  the  song,  "Who  killed  Cock 

Robin  ?  "  and  point  it  on  the  Modulator  from  memory, 
using  at  various  times  both  the  Sol-fa  syllables  and 
the  words. 

(2)  He  should  also  construct  little  phrases  *  of  his  own,  using 

all  the  sounds  he  has  learnt.  He  should  bear  in  mind 
that,  as  was  stated  above,  Te  can  be  used  as  the  note 
to  rest  upon  in  the  middle  of  the  phrase  just  as 

well  as  Soh. 

The  following  are  Models  :  — 

(a)    d     n     £  '  s     t     d1 


(3)  Impromptu  tunes  similar  to  the  above  should  be  pointed 
on  the  Modulator. 

*  These  original  phrases  should  always  be  sung  by  the  pupil,  and  Sol-fa  syllables  used. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  53 


STEP  V  (a).         Duple  Time.— Two-pulse  Sound. 

THE  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  5,  should  be  played  through  in  the  usual 
Listening  to  way,  and  questions  should  be  asked  similar  to  those  in 
the  tune.  ^G  previous  lessons. 

The  first  four  (or  eight)  bars  of  the  melody  should   then  be 

sung   by  the   teacher,  the   pupil   beating   the  time ;   following  this 

the  pupil    should   sing   the   same   passage  while   the 

Two -pulse  teacher  beats  the  time.  As  the  result  of  this 
sound. 

proceeding    the   fact  that  each   sound   lasts   for  two 

pulses  should  be  realized  without  difficulty. 

To  impress  this  fact  still  further  upon  his  attention  he  should  be 
directed  to  march,  making  one  step  to  every  pulse,  at  the  same  time 
P  act'ce  on  clapping  once  in  every  two  steps.  He  thus  indicates  the 
the  two-pulse  pulses  with  his  feet  and  the  note-values*  with  his 
sound.  hand.  The  reverse  of  this  should  also  be  practised, 

viz.,  the  claps  indicating  the  beats  and  the  steps  the  note-values,  f 


The  teacher  should  now  sing  or  play  the  melody  only  of  tne 
Rhythmic  Exercise,  the  pupil  naming  the  sounds  to  the  Sol-fa 
E  te  t  •  syllables  and  writing  them  in  his  book.  Directions 
Pitch  and  should  be  given  that  the  syllables  should  be  written  a 
Time-  little  distance  apart,  thus  : —  d1  t  d1  s  etc. 

Bar-lines  should  afterwards  be  placed  before  the  accented  syllables, 
thus : —  d1  t  |d'  |s  and  the  method  of  indicating  that 
each  sound  lasts  for  the  value  of  two  beats  should  be  shewn  by  means 
of  dots  in  the  middle  of  each  bar,  thus  : —  d'  '  t  :  d1  : 
(by  which  it  is  divided  into  two  spaces,  one  for  each  pulse).  A  horizontal 
line  should  be  added  in  each  of  the  blank  spaces,  to  indicate  that  the 
sound  is  continued  through  this  pulse  :  d  '•—  |t  :—  d1  :— 


: —  I  etc. 


*  The  term  "note- value"  is  used  merely  to  indicate  the  duration  of  a  sound 
without  reference  to  its  pitch. 

t  The  difficulty  that  children,  and  even  adults,  experience  in  maintaining 
regularity  of  pulse  as  they  sing  or  play  sounds  of  longer  or  shorter  duration  is  a  real 
one,  and  the  teacher  is  advised  to  give  much  practice  on  the  lines  suggested  above. 


54  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

When  all  this  has  been  accomplished,  the  pupil  should  phrase 
the  Rhythmic  Exercise  as  below  : — 


:-     t      :-     d'     :-     s     :-      d'     :-     t     :-     a1     :-     d     :- 


d       :-    |n      :-    |d      :-     |s      :-    |t 

and  afterwards  sing  it.  As  each  pulse  is  sung,  he  should  point  to  it 
(pointing  the  pulses  therefore,  instead  of  beating  them) ;  this  is  a  most 
useful  exercise. 

The  special  name  by  which  the  duration  of  a  two-pulse  sound  is 

recognized  is  Taa  aa,  the  consonant  of  the  second  Taa  being  dropped 

to  shew  that   this  first  sound  is  continued,  and   not 

name^aa  aa   sounded    afresh  at   the   second    beat.     It   should   be 

explained   that,  as    the    notational   sign  for    Taa  (or 

one-pulse  sound)  is  J  or  f ,  it  is  possible  to  tie  two  one-pulse  signs 

together,  thus : —  J    J,  to  represent  a  two-pulse  sound.     There  is, 

moreover,  a  special  sign  for  this,  viz.,  J  or  j0,  called  a  minim. 

The  pupil  should  now  write  the  time-names  of  all  the  sounds  in 
the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  and  then  write  their  notational  signs  upon  a 
line  underneath,  e.g.  :— 

Writing  the         —  — i     —  — i 

time-names  of  Itaa  :aa  Itaa  :aa  |taa:aa  |taa  :aa  |taa  :aa  |taa  :aa  Itaa  :aa  |taa  :aa| 
the  Rhythmic 


r-h— tr-lrH 


etc. 


r — n 

The  method  of  dictating  and  writing  down  the  above  will  be  found 
set  forth  on  page  49.  The  teacher  should  dictate  two  or  four  bars 
at  a  time,  at  his  own  discretion. 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  played  to  the  pupil,  in 

D'ctation  tests  •  orc^er  to  &iye  n^m  Practice  m  the  recognition  of  the 
Duration.  different  sound-lengths  and  their  corresponding  signs. 

(1)  xrs  ^  /ts  /* 


Time,  i  r  i    r  i  r  r 

(2) 
Triple   1                  1               1 

IT     I 
/ 

r   r  rr 

r  r  r  i 
-*\*  *  »\»  -\ 

Time,  ir  r  r  ir  rir  r 

(3)                                 ^ 
Quadruple    1                    1  _ 

ir  r 

r  f  r  i 

ir  r  nr  i  H 
3  o  T.  *  -  H 

Time.        If3     f    T    If*      T 

r  r 

P  r  r 

^  i  If  r  r  II 

MUSICAL    APPRECIATION .  55 

In  dictating  any  of  the  above  or  similar  passages  the  whole 

phrase   should    be   played    through   first,    to    enable   the  pupil  to 

discover  the   speed   of   the  pulses,  and  the  land   of 

^dictation    Time-     After  this  has  been  done  ifc  should  be  played 
again    in    fragments    (as    indicated    by    the    pauses). 

The  pupil  should  begin  to  beat  immediately  at  the  close  of  each 
fragment  so  dictated,  saying  the  time-names  of  the  sounds  he  has 
heard.  The  signs  for  these  should  then  be  written  down  and  the  bar 
lines  added  to  shew  the  position  of  the  strong  accents.  After  any 
one  of  these  passages  has  been  written  in  the  manner  shewn  above 
the  pupil  should — 

(1)  Tap  the  note- values  and  monotone  the  time-names. 

(2)  Count  the  time  and  tap  the  note-values. 

(3)  Beat  the  time  and  sing  the  note-values  to  Lah. 


The  following  passages  may  be  regarded  as  specimens  of  Sight- 
singing  exercises,  to  which  the  teacher  may  add  others  of  his  own. 
Sight-  Each  of  these  may  be  treated  in  the  three  ways 


singing :  indicated  above  :— 

Duration. 


(1)  Practise  writing  two-pulse  measures  in  Sol-fa  notation, 


Preparation.     e-9-  '•' 


etc. 


(2)  Practise  writing  crotchets  and  minims,  e.g. : — 

j  j  -  d  J 

(3)  Invent  time-exercises  in  Duple  time,  always  using  the 
minim  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  phrase,  e.g. : — 


J    J     J    J     J       I!  etc. 


56  AUH.iL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  V  (b).       Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Ray. 

THE  song,  "  Bye,  Baby  Bunting,"  should  be  played  straight  through 

in  the  usual  way  ;  its  gentle  swing,  as  well  as  its  soft  peacefulness, 

should  appeal  to  the  pupil,  and  he  should  be  shewn 

the  tune.          that  ^  ^s  built-up  of  four  phrases,  with  an  extension  of 


two  bars  at  the  end,  to  enable  the  first  word  to  be 
repeated.  The  effect  produced  by  the  fact  of  the  last  melody-note 
being  Soh,  and  not  the  usual  Doh,  should  also  be  specially  referred 
to,  and  the  pupil  should  beat  time  as  the  song  is  played  once  more. 
It  should  then  be  learnt  by  heart,  in  the  manner  indicated  in 
previous  Steps. 

The  teacher  should  next  tell  the  pupil  that  there  is  a  new  sound 
amongst  those  that  he  has  been  singing,  and  that  he  must  try  to 
The  new  discover  it,  and  realize  its  character.  To  help  him 

sound,  Ray.      jn  the  discovery  of  this  sound  the  following  passage 
should  first  be  played  — 


the  pupil  naming  them  d    n    n    s ;   then  the  question  :  Which  of  the 
four  succeeding  sounds  is  the  new  one  ?  should  be  put  :— 

^^& 


3 


The  answer  being  forthcoming,  the  teacher  should  explain  that  the 
character  of  this  sound  is  not  so  definite  as  the  character  of  those 
already  learnt ;  further,  that  it  varies  very  much  according  to  the 
way  in  which  it  is  approached  and  quitted.  For  example,  the  mental 
effect  or  character  of  this  sound  in  the  first  four  notes  of  the  tune 
is  somewhat  supplicatory  or  prayerful,  but  approached  from  upper 
Doh,  as  in  the  last  bar  but  one,  the  effect  is  more  pleading  or 
persuasive.* 

*  In  the  "School  Music  Teacher,"  by  Evans  and  McNaught,  the  following 
expressive  phrase  is  used  to  emphasize  the  mental  effect  when  Ray  is  approached 
from  upper  Doh. 


$*^ 

•7               >^ 
0 

^ 

dot 

=£= 

please 

;    do. 

MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


57 


The  name  Ray  should   be  given  to   the   new  sound  and   the 


hand-sign  for  it  shewn,  thus  :— 

directly  in  front 
Ray  and  its 
Hand-sign. 


the  arm  being  extended 
of  the  body,  as  before. 


The  teacher  should  then  play  or  sing  the  tune  in  small  sections  and 
should  request  the  pupil  to  give  the  Sol-fa  name  of  each  sound,  with 
its  particular  hand-sign.  The  tune  should  then  be  sung  straight 
through  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables,  and  also  to  Lah,  the  hand-sign  for 
each  sound  being  made  by  the  teacher  and  pupil. 


doh1 
te 

soh 
me 


doh 


The  position   of  Ray,  midway  between   Doh  and   Me, 
should    now    be    shewn    on    the     Modulator 


Sight- 
singing. 


as     in     the     margin,    and     the     pupil    should 
Sol-fa  the  tune    "  Bye,  Baby  Bunting,"  to  the 


teacher's  pointing. 


The  following,  among  other  tests,  should  also  be  pointed  for  the 
pupil  to  sing  : — 


(1)   doh 


doh 


(2)    doh 


doh 


(3)    doh7 


doh' 


te 


soh 


me 


pay 


soh 


me 


ray 


doh 


N.B. — The  pupil's  attention  should  be  drawn  to  the  fact  that  Bay,  like  Soh  and 
Te,  can  be  used  as  a  subsidiary  point  of  rest  or  repose.*  Like  Te,  it  is  also  very 
expectant  of  Doh,  if  it  happens  to  be  the  last  note  but  one  of  a  phrase,  or  other 
musical  period. 


•  See  example  in  footnote  on  page  51,  for  the  harmonic  reason  of  this. 


58 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


The  pupil  should  also  sing  the  following  and  similar  tests,  using 
both  Sol-fa  syllables  and  also  Lah  throughout :— 


(a) 


(1)    d      n       s       n 


r      n       s       n       d 


(2)d      r      n      s      d      n      s     '    n     r     n      s      n 


(3)nnrddr      n      s      n 


n      sd'srtrnrd 


(4)    d1      t     d'      s      n      s      r.       r      n      s      d'    n     r     d_ 


(b) 


:r      n 


n     :r    I  d     :— 


(2)     :d      d     :r      n     :r    Id     :n      r     :r 


n     :s 


d1    :d 


n     :r 


(8)  (Id     :r    In     :s    Id1    :n    Is     :-'  |'i     :n    |r     :n    Is     :r    Id     :-'| 


(1)  Sol-fa  the  tune,  "  Bye,  Baby  Bunting,"  from  memory, 
Preparation      pointing  to  the  syllables  on  the  Modulator ;   afterwards 

Sol-fa  the  tune,  making  the  hand-signs. 

(2)  Construct    short    tunes    upon    the    lines    suggested    in 

the  previous  steps.  The  first  phrase,  it  should  be 
remembered,  can  end  on  either  Soh,  Te  or  Ray.  The 
following  are  examples  :— 

(1)    d      r      n      £  '   n ^      n~~^A_ 


(2)    n      s      n      d 


n      s      d      r     d 


(D   (I 


(3)    d'      t     d'      s      n      d'      t.  '   d'      s      n      s      n     r     d_ 

(3)  Fill  up  the  following  bars  in  such  a  way  as  to  form  little 
melodious  phrases.  Write  in  Sol-fa  notation,  and  take 
care  that  the  last  note  of  each  phrase  is  a  long  one 
(two  beats) :— 

^"T^  n     «  {i'~~'~T~rT~;=!  ii 


(3)   (I 


(*>(! 


*  The  following  are  some  of  the  ways  in  which  these  bars  may  be  filled  up : — 


In    :s 


d   :- 


:n 


8    :t 


:n 


The  pupil  should  always  sing  the  tunes  that  he  writes. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  59 


STEP  VI  (a).    Triple  Time.— Three-pulse  Sound.— The 

One-line  Staff. 

THE   Rhythmic    Exercise,   No.    6,   should    be    played    through,    as 

Listening-  to     in    the   previous   steps,    the    pupil    beating    the    time 
the  tune  and     ,.      ,, .   ,      ,  .     -,  ., 

beating  time,   directly  he  has  recognized  it. 

The  teacher  should  then  assist  him  in  discovering  the  three- 
pulse  sound  in  the  same  way  as  in  the  case  of  that  of  two  pulses, 
viz. — the  first  few  notes  of  the  melody  should  first 
pufse^ound  be  sun&  or  Playecl  while  the  pupil  beats  the  time, 
and  then  the  pupil  should  sing  these  same  notes, 
while  the  teacher  beats  the  time. 

The  three-pulse  sound  having  been  realized,  practice  should  be 
given,  as  before,  in  clapping  the  note- values  and  stepping  the 
P  ct'ee  on  Pulses  (*"•&»  making  three  steps  to  each  clap).  This 
the  three-  should  then  be  reversed  :  the  pupil  clapping  the 
pulse  sound.  pulses  an(j  stepping  the  note-values  (see  page  53).  Other 
movements  on  the  same  principle  should  be  invented  by  both 
teacher  and  pupil,  as  such  practice  is  of  material  help  in  overcoming 
the  difficulty  of  doing  two  things  at  the  same  time,  viz.,  maintaining 
a  regular  pulse  while  singing  sounds  whose  duration  is  longer 
or  shorter  than  the  pulse. 


The  melody  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  written 
down  in  Sol-fa,  directions  being  given  for  the  syllables  to  be 
E  test-  spaced-out  thus:—  d  s  d  r 

Pitch  and         Bar-lines  should  then  be  placed  before  each  accented 
Time-  syllable,   thus :-      |  *  •  d  r 

and  the  teacher  should  explain  how  the  three-pulse  sound  is  indicated 
in  writing,  by  dividing  the  bar  up  into  three  parts  by  means  of  dots — 
d  :  :  s  :  :  d  :  :  r  :  :  and  writing  a  horizontal  line  in 
each  of  the  blank  spaces  to  shew  that  the  sound  is  to  be  continued 
through  these  pulses,  e.g.: —  d  :—  :—  a  :—  :—  d  :—  :—  r  :—  :—  etc. 
When  the  pupil  has  written  the  whole  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise 
in  this  way  he  should  phrase  it,  and  then  sing  it,  pointing  to  each 
syllable  (see  page  54). 


60  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

The  time-name,  Taa  aa  aa,  should  now  be  given  to  the  three- 
pulse  sound,  and  the  method  of  writing  it  shewn  ;  first,  as  three 
The  time-  one-pulse  sounds  tied  together,  thus —  J  J  J ;  then 
name :  as  a  two-pulse  and  a  one-pulse  sound  similarly  tied, 

i  aa  aa.        t|lus —  j      j .  an(j  iastiV)  as  a  dotted  minim,  thus —  J  . 

When  this  has  been  done,  the  pupil  should  write  the  time-names  of 
the  sounds  in  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  (or  part  of  it),  with  their 
corresponding  notational  signs  on  the  line  below,  e.g.  :— 

jtaa  :aa  :aa  jtaa  :aa  :aa  jtaa  :aa  :aa  jtaa  :aa  :aa  j 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  dictated  by  the  teacher 
Dictation  tests:  an(^  written  down  by  the  pupil.  (See  page  55  for 
Duration.  directions.) 

(1)    Duple. 
Triple,  ^-jp-p-j-js. 

(3)    Quadruple.  UE? p—jp—L^--— *-[-,»— *  —  *—j»-Us» &— |j 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  sung  (and  also  tapped) 

Sight-singing- :   in  the  three  ways  indicated  on  page  55  : — 
Duration. 


The  teacher  should  now  tell  the  pupil  that  instead  of  using 
Relative  pitch  Sol-fa  syllables  we  can  indicate  the  relative  pitch 
means  of  °^  sounds  by  notes,  i.e.,  note- values  placed  upon,  above, 
notes.  or  below  a  line,  e.g.  :— 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


61 


(1)  If  the  syllable  Doh  is  placed  on  a  line,  all  notes  so 
written  on  this  line  represent  the  pitch  of  Doh,  thus — 


h<» — » — *- 
I      I      I 


I 

(2)  If  the  syllable  Doh  is  placed  above  a  line,  all  notes  so 
written  above  this  line  represent  the  pitch  of  Doh,  thus — 


oca. 


f-f-rtr 


(3)  If  the  syllable  Doh  is  placed  below  a  line,  all  notes  so 
written  below  this  line  represent  the  pitch  of  Doh,  thus— 


DOH 


J  -  J  -  * 


Further,  if  the  position  of  Doh  is  fixed  on  a  line,  Ray  will  be 
Position  of  found  immediately  above  it,  e.g.:  —  —DOH—  HA*—  ,  and  if 
relation  tne  P0^^011  °f  Doh  *s  nxec^  below  a  line,  Ray  will 

to  Doh.  similarly  be  found  on  the  line  above  —  —  DOR—  RAY—  . 

The  following  examples  will  further  elucidate  this  :  — 


(a)         — DOH — r— *- 

on  the  line. '     I 

(b) DOH —    r-* 


Ray  above  the  i  line. 


j  .    J  . 


below  the  line. 


Ray  o?i  the  line. 


The  pupil  should  now  sing  the  following  and  similar  exercises  to 
inffinR- •  tne  Sol-fa  syllables.     He  should  always  bear  in  mind 
Pitch.  the  position  of  Doh,  as  Ray  is  only  discovered  by  its 

relationship  to  it : — 


(1) 

/O\          _-... 

£~      ~~         —        »~~*1*3      5        *         —        *        ~0        ^-v        I' 

r  r  r  r 

r  r  i    i    r  ii 
^  '  f^r  ~  .  *~~~?-*^ 

A*      0       *       •—       '—       —  - 

(A)        DOH— 

(3 

hr~f 

irrri      irriii" 

*~~s     jt           A  ^^  -H 

DOH 

r  r  r  r 

p     f  r  r  T  r  II 
^  ?  •  —  •  —  ^ 

(4)        DOH 

r  r  r  r  r  r 

r    r  r  r  r  r  r  r 

62  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

(1)  Practise  writing  three-pulse  measures  in  Sol-fa  notation. 
Preparation.         (2)  Practise  writing  crotchets,  minims,   and  dotted 
minims. 

(3)  Construct   tunes   in   triple    time    (in   Sol-fa   notation), 

using  a  three-pulse  sound  at  the  end  of  each  phrase. 

(4)  Write    the    following    in    Sol-fa,    using    Sol-fa    time- 

notation  :— 


(a)  BOH    I   J     J     J  [    rj J   I    J     J     J   I    J  • 

(b)  UOH    |     J  J     |      J       J       |      J       J       J    |      J     J      || 


(5)  Translate  the  following,  placing  the  requisite  notational 
signs  on,  above,  or  below  a  single  line,  as  the  case  may 
be.  Use  Doh  in  turn  upon  and  below  the  line  :— 

(a)  (|d    :-  :-  |r    :-  :-     r    :r    :-  |d    :-  :-  || 

(b)  :d     d    :r    :-    r    :d    :r     d    :-  :-    d    :- 


STEP  VI  (b).        Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Fah. 

THE  teacher  should  play  the  song  through  and  ask  the  pupil  questions 
similar  to  those  in  the  previous  Steps.  He  should  point  out  the 
important  resting-place  in  the  middle,  shewing  that  it  occurs  on  the 
sound  Soh,  and  is  of  three  beats'  duration.  The  fact  that  the  final 
sound  is  also,  unusually,  Soft,  and  of  the  value  of  three  beats,  should 
be  referred  to  by  the  teacher. 

Learning1  ^ne  ^une   snou^  then  be   learnt  by  heart  as   in 

the  tune.          preceding  Steps. 

The  pupil  should  next  fix  the  Sol-fa  syllables  to  the  sounds  of 
the  tune  as  it  is  played  in  small  sections  of  two  bars.*  At  the 
second  section— 


The  new  xT  Tig    J  I   J    j-4  ' 

sound  and 
its  character. 


he  should  be  told  to  listen  carefully,  and  to  say  which 


*  The  word  Section  here  is  used  in  its  technical  sense,  with  reference  to  the  sub- 
division of  the  phrase.    See  Chapter  VI  of  "  Form  in  Music."    (Stewart  Macpherson.) 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


53 


is  the  new  sound.  The  character  of  this  sound  is  somewhat 
similar  to  that  of  Soh  in  its  bold,  but  rather  bald,  feeling  when 
approached  from  Doh,  e.g.  : — 


being,  however,  far  less  bright.  This  degree  of  the  scale  has  often 
an  inclination  to  proceed  to  Me,  as  seen  in  bar  3  in  the  example 
above.  At  times,  too,  the  sound  is  a  little  cold  and  desolate,  e.g. : — 


(bars  4-7) 


The  name  Fall  should  now  be  given  to  this  sound,  and  its  hand-sign 
shewn  thus  :—        J^l^^  (the    reverse    of    Te.)     When   all    the 

sounds    have    been    named,    the    tune 

,      ,,   ,  n.         i  o  i  t 

should  be   sung  through  to  the  feol-fa 

syllables,  and  also  to  Lah,  both  teacher 
and  pupil  making  the  hand-signs. 


Fah,  and  its 
Hand-sign. 


doh' 
te 

• 

soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 


The    position  of   Fall    should   now    be    shewn    on    the 

Modulator.     It  should  be  indicated  close  to  Me,  just  as  Te  is 

placed  close  to  upper  Doh.*     The  tune,  "The 

sing-ing-.  North  Wind  doth  blow,"  and  also  the  following, 

among  other  tests,  should  then  be  sung  to  the 

teacher's  pointing  on  the  Modulator  :— 


doh 


doh 


*  The  teacher  will  realize  that  this  is  to  give  the  idea  of  the  smaller,  semitonio 
step  between  these  sounds,  as  3rd  and  4th  and  7th  and  8th  degrees  of  the  scale, 
respectively. 


64  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

The  following  and  similar  passages  should  also  be  used  as  Sight- 
singing  Exercises,  being  sung  first  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  and 
afterwards  to  Lah  : — 


(a)          (1)    d     n      •      d      •      f      n     jr    '    r      n      f      s      f     n 
(2)    n     f     n     r     tl^js    '   d     s      f     n     s     d. 


(3)    d1     t     d1     s     f     s     j-   '   n     f     s     d     r     n^d 


(4)    d     n     s     d1     t     s      f     n*r   '   n     f     s     d     f     n     r 


(b)  (i) 


Id  :n  |s  :f  |n  :r  <s  :—  a  :n  |r  :d  Is  :n  Id  :—  I 


(2)   /Id  :r  :n  If   :n  :f  Is   :d  :n  Is  :— :— Is   :f  :n    r   :n   :f 


n   :r   :s 


(3)  /Id  :n  :f  Is  :d  :d'  |t  :—  :—  Id1  :n  :f  Is  :r  :n  d  :—  :—  II 


(1)  Sol-fa  the  tune,  "The  North  Wind  doth  blow,"  from 

memory,  pointing  to  the  syllables  on  the  Modulator; 
afterwards  Sol-fa  the  tune,  making  the  hand-signs. 

(2)  Sol-fa  from  memory  two  of  the  former  tunes,  similarly 

pointing  on  the  Modulator. 

(3)  Sing  and  point  impromptu  tunes  including  Fah. 

(4)  Construct  simple  melodies  in  Duple  and  Triple  Times, 

writing  them  in  Sol-fa  notation.  The  final  sound  of 
each  phrase  should,  for  the  present,  be  of  the  value 
of  two  beats  in  Duple  Time,  or  three  beats  in  Triple 
Time,  e.g.  :— 


(1) 


(2)  2 


jj  j 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  65 


STEP  VII  (a).      Quadruple  Time.— Four-pulse  Sound. 

THE  Khythmic  Exercise,  No.   7,  should  be  played,  and  the  pupil 
should  beat  time  to  it  in  the  usual  way.     The  fact  that  each  sound 

in  the  melody  is  of  the  value  of  four  pulses,  or  beats 
pufsJsound      snould  be  recognized  without  much  difficulty,  and  tht> 

pupil  should  then  indicate  the  pulses  by  marching 
and  the  note-values  by  clapping,  taking  therefore  four  steps  to 
each  clap.  (See  previous  lessons.) 

Marching  and  clapping  should  afterwards  be  reversed  in  the 
manner  now  familiar,  and  other  rhythmic  movements  might  with 
advantage  be  devised  for  practice  on  the  four-pulse  sound. 
(See  page  59.) 


The  melody  of  the  Ehythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  used  as  a 
dictation  test,  directions  being  given  to  the  pupil  to  space  out  the 

syllables,  thus  : —   d  r  n  r 

Ear  tests.         The  bar-lines  should  then  be  added,  thus : — 


and  each  bar  divided  up  into  four  spaces  (one  for  each  pulse)  by 
means  of  a  short  vertical  line  to  indicate  the  half-bar,  with  dots  to 
divide  each  half-bar  into  two  parts,  thus  : — 


Afterwards  horizontal  lines  should  be  drawn  through  the  second, 
third  and  fourth  of  the  spaces  in  each  bar  or  measure,  to  indicate 
that  the  sound  continues  through  each  of  these  pulses,  e.g. : — 

d     :-    |-    :- 

When  the  whole  melody  has  been  written  out  in  this  way,  and 
the  phrasing-marks  added,  the  pupil  should  sing  it,  marching  or 
beating  time. 


66  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

The  time-name,  Taa  aa  aa  aa*  should  be  given  to  the  four-pulse 

The  time-         sound.     With   regard   to   its  notation,  the   teacher  is 

name,  advised   to  develop  this   in   a   manner  corresponding 

to  that  shewn  in  connexion  with  the  two -pulse  and 

three -pulse  sounds  in  preceding  Steps  in  this  order : — 

J ^J> J^ fj  ,  ^  _^&  ,  d^     ^J  » 

afterwards  introducing  the  pupil  to  its  own  special  sign,  viz.,  the 
semibreve,  o. 

The  pupil  should  then  write  the  time-names  corresponding  to 
the  various  sounds  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  or  part  of  it,  adding  the 
bar-lines  and  writing  the  note-values  immediately  below,  upon  a 
horizontal  line : — 


I taa   :aa     |aa    :aa       taa    :aa    |aa    :aa 


etc. 

[-etc. 


The  following  are  specimens  of  dictation  tests  in  Duration,  to 
which  the  teacher  should  add  others  of  his  own  :— 

Dictation     (1)  U* — + — & \-fs>-* f   I  f — f — f — f   I    & 11 

tests : 
Duration. 


~r  r  r  \        tr      ~rr 

(Directions  as  to  giving  the  above  tests  will  be  found  on  page  55.) 

The  next  tests  given  should  combine  time  and  pitch.  Only  the 
two  pitches  of  Doh  and  Kay  are  used  ;  these  the  pupil  must  indicate 
by  note-values  written  on,  above,  or  below  a  single  line, 
as  snewn  *n  tne  previous  Step  (page  61).  The  teacher 
should  play  or  sing  the  pitch  of  Doh  before  giving  any 
test,  and  tell  the  pupil  whether  he  wishes  Doh  to  be  indicated  upon 
or  below  the  line,  as  in  the  following  specimen  tests  : — 


rrrlr  rrlrrrrl    Irr  r  Irrr  Ir  r  rlp  II 


J  J  |J  J    J-[^  '  Jj  ;  J  J  |J  J    J  [^    'ft 


*  This  name  the  teacher  should  elicit  from  the  pupil,  from  his  previous  experience. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  67 

The  idea  of  the  staff  may  now  be  developed  further,  in  connexion 
Sight-  with  the  pupil's  Sight-singing  studies.     He  should  be 

singing: :  told  that  if  Doh  is  on  a  line,  Te,*  will  be  below  it,  and, 

Position  . 

Of  Te,.  if  Doh  is  above  a  line,  le,  will  be  on  it,  e.g.: — 

I I I      l       !      |J     J    J 

(a)   DOH •     |»     p hrerJ— *— ^ »     »     o- 

on  the  line.    1 1         I         I 

(b)    DPJH \*      0      p LTE ,»       •       p If       f      fg 

V    '     above  the  line.  I  |          |          |  I         I          I          I  II          '          ' 

The    following    and    similar    tests    should    then    be    sung    to 
Sol-fa  and  afterwards  to  Lah  : — 


(1)  Write  the  notes  indicated   by  the  following  passage, 
Preparation.     usmg  a  single   line  and  regarding  it  as  representing 


Doh:— 


d    :r    :d      t,   :d    :r      d    :—  :ti     d    :—  :— 
(2)  Write  the  following  in  Sol-fa  : — 


[f-r-lr  r  Ir  r  Ir    If  r  Ir  r  Ir  r  ^r 


STEP  VII  (b).     Imitation  and  Memorization  of  Lah. 

AFTER  the  pupil  has  answered  questions  relating  to  the  time  and 
Learning-  character  of  the  song,  "  Old  Abram  Brown,"  and  has 
the  tune.  ajso  iearnt  it  by  heart,  he  should  be  asked  to  find  out 
any  new  sound  contained  therein,  and  if  possible  to  describe  its 
character.  This  sound  will  of  course  be  the  A  in  bars  1,  2,  3,  etc., 

*  Te  below  any  given  Doh  is  indicated  thus : —  Tei  or  t(    Its  position  should  be 
shewn  upon  the  Modulator,  and  its  effect  compared  with  that  of  Te  below  Upper  Doh. 


68 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


and  in  the  opening  phrase  of  the  tune  the  tendency  which  this  new 
sound  has  to  fall  to  Soh  will  readily  be  noticed,  thus  : — 

x 


Character  of 
new  sound. 


Old       A-  bram  Brown 


When  approached  from  Upper  Doh  through  Te,  it  will  easily  be  felt 
to  have  a  somewhat  sad  effect,  an  effect  by  which  it  is  generally 
recognized  :— 


(Bars  5  and  6  of  tune.) 


p 

' 


The  name  Lah  should  be  given  to  the  new  sound,  and  the  hand- 
sign  for  it,  thus :—       C*0P|      shewn,    the   palm   of   the   hand   being 

turned  towards  the  body. 

The  effect  of  the  dropped  wrist 
well  illustrates  the  drooping  or  weeping 
character  of  the  sound. 

The    pupil   should   now   give   the 
Sol-fa  names  to  all  the  sounds  in  the 
tune,  and   then   sing  it   to   the   Sol-fa 
syllables,  and  also  to  Lah,  making  the  hand-signs  at  the  same  time. 


The  name 
Lah,  with  its 
Hand-sign. 


doh' 
te 

lah 

soh 

rah 
me 

ray 
doh 


Sigrht- 
singring;. 


The  position  of  Lah  should  then  be  shewn  on  the  Modulator 
as  in  the  margin.  A  complete  one-column 
Modulator  can  now  be  used,  as  all  the  sounds  of 
the  major  scale  have  been  studied.  "  Abram 

Brown,"  and  also  the  following  exercises,  should  be  pointed  on 

this  Modulator  :— 

/"•N 

doh1 


(1)     doh 


(2)     doh1 


lah 


soh 


soh 


soh 


me 


ray 


te 


lah 


soh 


soh 


doh 


doh' 


MUSICAL    APPBECIATION. 


69 


The  following  among  others  should  also  be  sung  by  the  pupil, 
both  to  Sol-fa  syllables  and  to  Lah  : — 


(1) 


n      f      s 


>    s      d1      t      1      s 


(2)    d     n      s      1      d*  8.       d1     t      1      t      d1     B     g 


t     d1     t      1     s     f     rT^       r     n     f     s     1      1     t 


rt    s     1     8     1     t     s     t     d| 


(3) 


(4)    d     n    d     s     d1     1     s     n 


(5)  |:d     Is    : 


s    : 


:f     ls     f    :n     r    :s     n    :r     d 


(6)      :s    d1  :t    :1    s    :f  :n    r   :d   :n    n^:— 


I  I 
:r  In   :f   :s 


:t   :d'  r   :s   :n  Id   :— I 


The  teacher  may,  at  this  point  in  the  pupil's  study,  safely  and 

effectively  introduce   a  greater  element  of  variety  in 
Directions  to    .  .    0.  .  ;    .     .  °/CY  ,      _       ,  .    ,         , 

teacher  as  to    nis  oight-smgmg  tests,     (bee  examples  5  and  o  above.) 

the  writing:      This  may  be  achieved  by  occasionally  making  the  last 
of  tunes.  J  J 

note  of  a  phrase  occur  upon  a  weak  beat,  e.g. : — 


x  i 


*^ 

—  1  —  1 

*-.J- 

> 

=it=*= 

1  —  0 

NH 

iil 

IP 

It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  above  passage,  instead  of  both  phrases 
ending  upon  a  strong  beat,  thus  : — 


^ 


the  first  phrase  ends  upon  a  weak  beat,  with  two  slurred  notes, 
A  and  G,  in  place  of  the  one  long  note,  G  ;  while  the  second  ends  upon 
a  strong  beat  as  heretofore.  The  result  of  this  proceeding  is  that  the 
middle  resting-place  is  rendered  less  obvious,  melodic  variety  is 
secured,  and  a  graceful  "  curve  "  given  to  the  melody. 

In  succeeding  Sight-singing  exercises  and  Ear-tests  the  teacher 
should  occasionally  introduce  phrase-endings  similar  to  the  above; 
but  for  the  present  he  should  treat  only  the  first  phrase  in  this 


70 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


manner,  and  then  only  by  approaching  the  Soh,  Te,  or  Ray  sounds  by 
those  immediately  above,  slurring  the  first  note  to  the  second,  e.g. : — 

1     s 


_-. .  is  . n     r 

i) 42,  ju  rij  JiJjii (Wj  ju  rij  Jij  jii 

tj ,-*•  •  —  \        *)    ^  '         '  ~^"i 


(iii)  4l  j    J  I  J  E^E£^ 


When  a  phrase  finishes  upon  a  weak  beat  in  the  above  manner, 
it  is  said  to  have  a  "feminine  ending."  If  its  termination  occurs 
upon  a  strong  beat  (as  in  all  the  examples  in  previous  Steps)  the 
ending  is  said  to  be  "masculine." 

The  teacher  should  carefully  explain  the  difference  between 
these  two  forms,  and  shew  that  in  the  case  of  a  "  feminine 
ending,"  the  preceding  sounds  of  the  phrase  really  lead  up  to  its  last 
strong  accent,  and  then  (as  was  stated  on  page  48)  fall  away  from  this 
to  the  final  sound.  The  truth  of  this  will  be  felt  if  the  "  endings  " 
are  harmonized : — 


(1)  Impromptu  tunes  to  be  pointed  on  the  Modulator. 

(2)  Short  tunes  to  be  written  on  the  above  plan,  i.e.t 

with  the  occasional  use  of  "feminine  endings." 
(3)  An  impromptu  tune  to  be  pointed  on  the  Modulator 

to  the  words  of  "  Little  Jack  Horner." 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


71 


STEP  VIII  (a).    The  Staff  of  Two  Lines.— Further  Practice 

in  Duration. 


THE  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  8,  should  be  played  in  the  usual  way,  the 
pupil  beating  the  time.  Afterwards  the  pupil  should  step  the  note- 
Beating  values  and  indicate  the  pulses  by  a  downward,  upward, 
time,  etc.  and  outward  movement  of  both  arms. 

N.B. — As  the  note-values  in  each  bar  are  here  varied,  the  pupil  may,  perhaps, 
find  some  little  difficulty  at  the  outset  in  stepping  them.  In  this  case  the  teacher 
should  extemporize  Ehythmic  Exercises  based  upon  the  following  more  simple  note- 
values,  thus  leading  up  gradually  to  the  Ehythmic  Exercise,  No.  8: — 

*  Ehythmic  Exercise  (a). 

t  Up,  down,  out,  up,    down,  out,  up,    down,  out,  up,    down,  out. 


J-LJ J- 


B 


J-UL 


B 


R 


etc. 


Ehythmic  Exercise  (b). 

down,  in,  out,  up,   down,  in,  out,  up,   down,  in,  out,  up,    down,  in,  out. 


Up,    down,  i 

-J-UU 


J- 


B 


B 


J-U- 


B 


etc. 


Ehythmic  Exercise  (c). 

Down,  up,     down,  up,  down,  up,    down,  up. 

-J       J    I    J I    J       J    I    gi 1  etc. 

L       B    I    L I    B      L     I    B 1 

Ehythmic  Exercise  (d). 


1 

)own,  up,  down, 

up, 

down,  uj 

J 

»,  down,  up, 

down,  up,  down,  up. 

?  r 

B 

L"  

'         R 

TJ  r  *      * 

Ehythmic 
Down,  out,  up 

Exercise  (e). 
,  down,  out,  up, 

J       J       J 

down 

,out,  up,  e 

tc. 

J  J  J 

J    .          J     J 

T  x  

^  •         *       * 
•R        T, 

V 

•R 

^»             - 

.     T,      R 

T,V                         R       T 

etc. 


etc. 


In  the  above  exercises  the  pupil  must  make  a  vigorous  down-movement  of  the 
arm  as  well  as  a  stamp  with  the  foot  in  order  to  indicate  the  accented  pulse. 

When  the  sound  is  not  struck  on  the  accent  (as  in  d  and  e)  the  pupil  must  feel 
the  down  arm-movement  very  strongly. 


The  melody  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  used  as  a 
dictation  test  in  pitch  and  time  as  in  previous  lessons,  and  written 
Ear  tests  :  down  by  the  pupil  as  follows  : — 


pitch  and  time. 


il 


-  :d    :r 


:f 


etc. 


*  If  the  teacher  cannot  improvise,  he  will  find  material  in  the  Ehythmic 
Marches  of  Jaques-Dalcroze. 

I  The  words  above  the  notes  apply  to  the  arm -movements,  and  the  letters  below 
to  the  right  or  left  steps.  • 


72  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

When  this  has  been  completed  in  Sol-fa,  the  pupil  should 
write  the  time-names  corresponding  to  the  various  sounds,  adding 
their  notational  signs  on  a  line  underneath,  e.g. : — 

taa  :taa 

etc. 

N.B. — The  teacher  should  carefully  explain  the  use  of  the  tie  in  the  writing  of  a 
sound  of  four  beats  in  Triple  time. 


taa   :aa   :aa 

aa  :taa  :taa 

^m       »       » 

taa   :aa   :aa 

aa  :taa  :taa 

—  <^~i 

••"Tf  • 

1 

r  r  r 

1 

1       1       1 

The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  dictated  by  the  teacher 

Dictation  tests  :  and   written    down    by   the   pupil.      (For  directions 
Duration.  see  page  55.) 


_ 

«  Inr  r  Ir  '  —  If  —  Ir  r  r  Ir  —  r  If 

/?\  _  ^  /Ts 

<2)  \rr~  4rr  r  Ir  •  —  Ir  r  r  Ir  r  r  Ir  ' 


Iii    the    following  the    pupil  must    write    the    pitch    as    well 
D*       i  m  as    the    duration   of    the   sounds.      Only    the    three 

Pitch  and       ' '  different    pitches    of  Doh,   Ray  and   Te,  are    used ; 
Duration.  these  must  be    indicated   upon,  above  and  below  a 

single  line,  as  in  Step  VII  (a) :— 

w  °°H  Ir  r  r  Ir  •  Ir  r  r  I J  •  Ir  r  r  Ir  r  Ir  J  Ir  •  II 

(2)      ,^J-J-J-J-|J     J    J         | J     J     J         ]j J f 

<3)  -  |r  r  r  If — Ir  r  r  Ir1 — H 
(*)  °°H  Ir  r  Ir  r  Ir  r  Ir  r  Ir — IF — If  r  Ir — H 


In    the  pupil's    next  exercises  in    Sight-singing,   the    teacher 

Sight-  should   introduce    him  to    a    staff    of   two    lines,   as 

sing-ing:.  indicated   below,   Doh  being   placed   in    turn  in    the 

three  following  positions  : — 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  73 


(1)         °      'ujj01"1      D0~       »        *~^V    *  (2) 


(3)   Doh  under  bottom  line.    g§H  —       ^       ^  —  RAY—  »  —  [] 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  pitch  of  Me  with  relation  to  Doh  is  indicated  by  the 
above  examples.  It  is  obvious  that,  in  Examples  1  and  2,  the  position  of  Doh 
necessitates  Me  being  written  upon  an  additional  line. 

The  following  and  similar  passages  should  then  be  sung  (i)  to  Sol-fa 
syllables,  and  (ii)  to  Lah  :  — 


"l  .    J  . 

i  j  i  J  '  — 

1  J     1 

^ 

J  J    J1  II 

DOH- 

2) 

E5HI 

3) 

..  ,_...__,..,.., 

i  ^  £«£  _  9  

1 

1      -H1  —  H 

i*       *                   * 

»    1  _  J         L 

*       i    J  '     n 

^       \          """         <*       ~ 

1       1    J~"? 

1         « 

m          CSQ 

r  '        r 

'  '     1 

1                       II 

1  1    J     i    J  i  J     j  ' 

'J     J    J 

-t—  r—  ^  H 

RULE.  —  If  Doh  is  on  a  line,  Me  will  be  on  the  line  next  above. 
If  Doh  is  in  a  space  (i.e.,  above  or  below  any  line)  Me  will  be  in  the 
space  next  above. 

(1)  Write  the  following  in  Sol-fa,  indicating  both  time  and 
pitch  :  — 

.  (.)~4.-|.|j  JiJjTirl'rrrlr 


rr-ir  r  ir  r  iir  r  i 


(2)  Write  the  following  on  a  staff  of  two  lines,  using  in  turn 
the  three  different  positions  for  Doh  as  shewn  above, 
viz.,  (i)  on  the  bottom  line  ;  (ii)  below  the  bottom  line ; 
(iii)  between  the  two  lines  : — 

(a)    d    n    d    r     n    d^r_     r    n    r    d 


(b)    n    r    n    d    d    r    n r      n    r    d    r    r    rr^d_ 

(3)  Write  the  following  on  two  lines,  placing  Doh  in  turn 
upon  the  bottom  line,  and  between  the  two  lines  : — 

|:d      In      :r      :d       d      :t,      :d       r      :n      :d      |r      :—    :r     X 
/In       :r       :d        t,       :d       :n       In       :—      :r       Id        :—       || 


74  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  VIII  (b).  The  Scale. 

THE  song,  "  Little  Miss  Muffet,"  should  be  learnt  in  the  usual  way, 
Learning-  the  pupil  afterwards  adding  the  Sol-fa  names  to  the 
the  tune.  melody  and  singing  the  tune  to  these  syllables  and  to  Lah. 

He  should  then  get  quite  familiar  with  the  consecutive  order  of  the 
syllables  up  and  down  the  Modulatorfand  should  be  told  that  singing 
them  thus  is  termed  singing  a  scale  (L.  scala,  a  ladder). 
He  should  notice  how  the  mental  effect  of  each  scale- 
degree  is  modified  by  the  fact  of  its  moving  conjunctly  (i.e.,  by  step). 
For  example,  in  thus  proceeding  upwards  from  Doh  to  upper  Doh,  the 
natural  downward  tendency  of  Fah  and  Lah  is  no  longer  felt,  the  ear 
readily  following  their  upward  progression  towards  their  ultimate 
destination  (viz.,  the  upper  Doh).  Likewise,  in  proceeding  from 
upper  Doh  to  lower  Doh,  the  upward  tendency  of  Te  is  similarly 
completely  destroyed,  and  it  moves  downwards  quite  satisfactorily 
to  the  ear.  Ray,  it  should  be  observed,  is  equally  attracted  by  Me  and 
Doh,  and  therefore  is  free  to  go  up  or  down  under  any  circumstance. 

From  what  has  already  been  learnt  concerning  the  different 
mental  effects  of  the  sounds  of  the  scale,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that 
Two  kinds  of  tnese  soun(ls  divide  into  two  classes  ;  one  in  which  the 
sounds  in  sense  of  rest  or  repose  is  inherent,  and  the  other  in 

poip  i 

which  that  of  activity  or  motion  is  prominent.  T 
In  the  former  class  are  included  the  sounds  Doh,  Me,  Soh, 


(In  Key  C.) 


arid  in  the  latter,  Te,  Ray,  Fah,  Lah, 


(In  Key  C.)  jg 


For  example,  when  any  of  the  sounds  Te,  Ray.  Fah,  Lah  are 
employed,  there  is  a  feeling   of  expectancy  created,  which  is  not 

*  The  teacher  is  now  advised  to  use  a  printed  Modulator  (see  footnote,  page  95). 
t  These  tendencies,  it  need  hardly  be  said,  are  frequently  modified  by  special 
forms  of  harmonization,  etc. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


75 


satisfied  until  one  of  the  notes  of  the  Tonic  Chord  (i.e.,  Doh,  Me, 
Soh)  is  reached,  e.g. : — 

Doh  Me  Soh  Doh 


ir  -f-^-^-        *— • 

Doh,  Me  and  Soh  may  therefore  be  regarded  (so  to  speak)  as 
"  Sounds  of  Attraction,"  and  taken  in  conjunction  with  one  another 
as  the  Tonic  Chord,  form  a  centre  to  which  all  the  sounds  of  the  key 
naturally  tend,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following  illustrations  : — * 


Lah 


The  teacher  should  now  point  Modulator  exercises  for  the 
pupil  to  sing,  employing  all  the  sounds  of  the  Scale.  The  natural 
tendency  of  each  scale -degree  should  be  observed 
carefully,  and  exceptions  to  this  should  be  made  only 
when  the  scale  line  is  followed  up  or  down.  Skips  in 
the  melody  should  at  first  be  made  only  between  the  "sounds  of 
attraction,"  viz.,  the  sounds  of  the  Tonic  chord. 

*  From  this  we  see  that  the  law  of  alternate  activity  and  rest  is  inherent  in 
the  scale  sounds  as  it  is  in  rhythmic-movement,  and  a  successful  melody — one 
that  seems  to  flow  naturally — depends  upon  a  subtle  moving  to  and  from  sounds 
of  so-called  motion  and  those  of  so-called  rest,  the  former  moving  by  reason  of  their 
own  inherent  quality,  the  latter  only  through  some  outside  impulse,  harmonic  or 
rhythmic.  The  following  examples  will  illustrate  this : — 

"  Last  Eose  of  Summer." 


I 

J. 


BEETHOVEN. — Sonata  in  E  (Op.  90). 


76 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


The   following  and   similar  tests  should  also  be  sung  by  the 
pupil : — 

(1) 


(2)    d     s     f 


(3)    r~p         s    1 


r  '  rT'   t    1 


(4)    :g    n  :f  :•  Id  :-:d    r  :n  :d    s  :-: 


:t  :d'    f  :n  :r    s  :n  :r    d  :- 


:f      s    :-  |n    :d      r    :-  |r    :n      f    :n 


:s      d    :~ 


(6){:n    |  s    :-  |d    :r    |n    :d     s    :n    |f    :-  |n    :s    |r    :-  Id'  || 

N.B. — The  pupil  should  be  told  to  observe  that,  in  Examples  4,  5  and  6  above,  the 
first  bar  of  each  phrase  is  preceded  by  one  or  more  unaccented  sounds.  These  unaccented 
sounds  preceding  the  first  strong  accent  of  a  phrase  form  a  kind  of  "  melodic  prefix," 
which  is  called  by  some  writers  an  Anacrusis.  (Gr.  anakrouo,  to  thrust  back.) 

It  will  already  have  been  noticed  that  phrases  need  not  always  begin  upon  the 
first  beat  of  a  bar,  nor  of  necessity  end  upon  the  first  beat. 


(1)  Construct  some  short  tunes,  beginning  each  phrase  with 
Preparation,     an  "anacrusis"  (or  melodic  prefix),  and  finishing  with  a 
"  masculine  ending  "  (see  page  70),  e.g.  : — 


masc. 
ending,  anac. 


masc. 
ending. 


JIJ    J    J 


f 


r 


J 


(2)  Construct  some  short  tunes,  beginning  each  phrase  with 
an  "anacrusis,"  and  finishing  the  announcing  phrase 
with  a  "  feminine  ending,"  and  the  responsive  phrase 
with  a  "  masculine  ending,"  e.g.  :— 


fern, 
ending,      anac. 


maso. 
ending. 


r 


Announcing  phrase. 


I Responsive  phrase. 


%*  The  tunc<3  constructed  by  the  pupil  are  to  be  written  in  Sol-fa. 


MUSICAL    APPBECIATION. 


77 


STEP  IX  (a).    Syncopation.— The  Staff  of  Three  Lines. 

THE  pupil  should  beat  time  to  the  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  9,  and 
his  attention  should  be  drawn  to  the  unusual  accent  on  the  second 
beat  of  the  bar,  occurring  in  many  places  in  the  course  of  the  piece. 

He  should  also  be  told  to  observe  the  fact  that  in  the 
th^  tun?  to  last  phrase  of  all  no  note  is  struck  on  the  first  or  third 

beat  of  each  bar  in  the  melody,  and  that  this  has 
the  effect  of  throwing  the  accent  back  to  the  point  at  which  a 
note  is  sounded.  When  a  note  is  thus  sounded  on  the  normally 
unaccented  beat  and  continued  over  the  next  normally  accented  beat, 
the  effect  is  called  Syncopation.* 

The  melody  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  written 
down  in  Sol-fa,  as  in  previous  Steps,  the  pupil  indicating  the  duration 
as  well  as  the  pitch,  e.g. : — 


Ear  tests: 
Pitch  and 
Time. 


d    :d    I-  :n 


:s     —  :n 


d    :d    I—  :n 


8     :—  |—  etc. 


The  time-names  corresponding  to  the  various  sounds 
should    afterwards    be    written   and,    as    before,   the 
no tational- signs  indicated  on  a  line  below,  thus  : — 


taa 

taa:  taa   :aa 

:taa 

taa  :taa   :aa 

:taa 

r 

1 

etc. 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  dictated  by  the 
Dictation  teacher  and  written  down  by  the  pupil  in  the 
tests.  usual  way  : — 

(a)  Duration. 


j 


J 


(2) 


|J 


J    J       |J    J       Jjj     J     J       |J     J     J 


*  For  further  particulars  as   to   Syncopation,  see  page   25  of   "  Eudiments   of 
Music."     (Stewart  Macpherson.)  :    :  I 


78  AURAL    CULTURE   BASED    UPON 

(b)  Pitch  and  Duration.     (See  pages  66  and  73.) 


«  gir    r  J  ir  r  r'  Ir  r  r 


ir  r  r  Ir  r' '-'  Ir  r  r 


The  teacher  should  now  develop  the  idea  of  the  staff  still  further, 
Sight-  and  in  so  doing,  should  shew  that  if  Me  is  placed  on  a 

singing.  jjnej  Yah  will  be  just  above  it  ;  also  that  if  Me  is  in  a 

space,  Fah  will  be  upon  the  line  immediately  above  it,  e.g.  :— 
The  position  ME—  H*a  —  «  — 


of  Fah. 

The  pupil  should  then  sing  the  following  and  similar  exercises, 
first  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  and  then  to  the  syllable  Lah  :— 


|J  r  r  Ir 


<2>  °oH-p  r  |J  r  r  r  ir>'  >  r  ir  r  r  r  I^H 
<3>  •»  u  r  Ir    Ir  J  fr  Mr  J 1^     II 

It  should  then  be  pointed  out  that  if  Fah  is  placed  on  a  line,  Soh 
will  be  written  just  above  it,  e.g. : — 

The  position  ME    j  FAH — SOB    •  \      gen — \\ 

of  Soh. 

consequently,  if  Fah  is  above  a  line,  another  line  must  be  added 
to  indicate  Soh,  a  staff  of  three  lines  thus  being  formed  : — 


RULE. — If    Doh    is    below    a    line,   Me  will   be   above  it  (in 

the     first    space)    and     Soh    in    the    second    space, 
mree  11 

positions  of      thus : —    SP:    "  *   m          If  Doh  is  on  the   first  line, 

Doh  on  the 

Staff  of  Me   will   be  on   the   second,    and  Soh   on  the  third 

three  lines.  SOH •   \\ 

line,  thus  : —  ggH— »   *~- 

If  Doh  is  in  the  first  space,  Me  will  be  in  the  second,  and  Soh 

SQH ^11 

in  the  third  space,  thus  : —   pgn   *    m         [] 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


79 


The  pupil   should  sing  the   following  and  similar  tests  (i)   to 
Sig-ht-singringr.    Sol-fa  syllables,  and  (ii)  to  Lah  : — 


r  r      rr     r  r 


+ 

r 


m 

r 


r 


(3) 


r 


v 


r  r   r 


M 


'- 


|r 


W  «J-»l-j-J^E 


r  I  J    j    j 

*         Z7^ 


(1)  Write   the    following   in   Sol-fa,   indicating   both  time 
Preparation,     and  pitch  : — 


•>!  J  •)  »'  I  r  I 


(b) 


3 


r  r|J  J 


DOH 


(c)   pon: 


(2)  Write  the  following  on  the  three-line  staff,  using  Doh 
in  each  of  the  above  three  positions  in  turn,  viz.,  below 
the  first  line  ;  on  the  first  line ;  in  the  first  space  : — 


(a)  /:d     d     :n      s     :n      f      :n 


-    |r      :n      Id      :s      |n 


:d  Id  :r    :n    f  :— :n   r   :n   :d    r   :— :—  r   :n   :f  Is   :— :n    f  :— :r    d   :— 


80  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

STEP  IX  (b).   The  Tonic,  Dominant  and  Sub-Dominant  Chords.— 
Perfect  and  Imperfect  Cadences. 

THE  song,  "As  Tommy  was  walking,"  should  be  learnt  in  the 
Learning1  the  usual  way,  and  the  Sol-fa  names  added.  Questions 
tune-  should  also  be  asked  with  reference  to  the  character 

of  the  piece,  similar  to  those  in  previous  Steps. 

The  teacher  should  now  point  out  that  the  notes  of  the  tune 
do  not  move  conjunctly  (i.e.,  by  step)  up  and  down  the  scale,  but 
The  three  disjunctly  (i.e.,  by  skip).  For  instance,  in  bars  seven 
principal  and  eight  the  melody  proceeds  along  the  now  familiar 
progression,  d1,  s,  n,  d,  while  at  bars  five  and  six  there 
is  a  movement  upon  the  sounds  s,  t,  r1,*  and,  at  bars  nine  and  ten, 
upon  the  sounds,  f,  1,  d1. 

It  should  be  explained  that  when  any  of  these  three  different 
sets  of  sounds  are  played  or  sung  together,  they  form  chords,  the 
Tonic,  combination  of  d,  n,  s  producing  the  Doh,  or  Tonic, 

Dominant  chord ;  that  of  s,  t,  r1  the  Soh,  or  Dominant,  chord ; 
dominant  and  that  of  f,  1,  d1  the  Fah,  or  Sub-dominant,  chord, 
chords.  Each  of  these  chords  takes  its  name  from  its  lowest 

note,  called  the  root  of  the  chord. 

If  the  Tonic  chord  is  played,  and  the  Dominant  or  Sub- 
dominant  chord  contrasted  with  it,  the  mental  effects  of  these  three 
m,  .  chords  will  be  found  to  be  somewhat  as  follows  : — 

mental  The  Tonic  chord   is   firm   and   strong,  being  the 

ec    '  centre  of  repose  in  the  key ; 

The  Dominant  chord  is  bright  and  very  expectant  of  the  Doh  chord ; 

The  Sub-dominant  chord  is  heavy  and  somewhat  dull.  It  shares 
a  little  of  the  expectancy  of  the  Soh  chord  for  that  of  Doh,  but  only 
in  so  far  that  it  has  a  desire  ultimately  to  return  to  that  Doh  (or 
Tonic)  chord.  

The  teacher  should  now  give  the  pupil  practice  on  the  Modulator, 
Sight-singing-  m  order  to  familiarize  him  with  the  Sol-fa  names  of  these 
exercises.  chords.  An  exercise  such  as  the  following,  pointed  on 
the  Modulator,  and  sung  to  the  syllables,  will  soon  achieve  this  : — 

*  Upper  Eay,  Me,  Fah,  etc.,  are  indicated  in  the  same  manner  as  Upper  Doh,  e.g. : — 
d1,  r1,  n1,  f ',  etc.  At  this  point  in  the  pupil's  work  the  position  of  Upper  Eay  should 
be  shewn  on  the  Modulator,  and  its  effect  compared  with  that  of  the  Eay  below. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


81 


d  n  s  n  etc. 


I   '    f  1  d1  1  etc. 


The  above  exercise  should  be  sung  quite  slowly  at  first,  the  speed  being 
increased  as  the  pupil  becomes  familiar  with  the  different  groups  of 
syllables. 

The  pupil's  ear  should  now  be  tested,  the  teacher  requiring  him 
to  recognize  the  Tonic,  Dominant  and  Sub-dominant  chords  as  they 
Ear  tests  on  are  played.  To  this  end  the  scale  should,  as  a  rule, 

the  Tonic,         ^e  played  first,  one  of  the  three  chords  being  played 
Dominant  and  .          ,.  .  •  .  i     •,      * 

Sub-dominant  immediately  afterwards,  the  pupil  saying  which  chord 

chords.  ft  is>  anj  singing  it  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables,  e.g.,  d,  n,  s; 

s,  t,  r1 ;  or  f,  i,  d1. 

When  these  chords  can  be  easily  recognized  and  sung  as  above 
indicated,  the  pupil  should,  on  hearing  any  one  of  them  played,  be 
called  upon  to  sing  the  three  notes  of  that  chord  in  any  order.  For 
example,  the  teacher,  after  playing  the  Tonic  chord  of  any  key,* 
(Key  c.)  should  request  the  pupil  to  sing  (i)  the  top  note, 
(ii)  the  middle  note,  and  (iii)  the  bottom  note 

v    '  v      ' 

(i.e.,  s-n-d).  He  should  then  strike  the  chord 
again,  and  ask  for  the  notes  in  another  order,  e.g. :  (i)  the  middle  note, 
(ii)  the  bottom  note,  and  (iii)  the  top  note  (i.e.,  n-d-s),  etc.  The 
Dominant  and  Sub-dominant  chords  should  be  treated  in  the 
same  way. 

These  are  the  first  important  steps  in  the  direction  of  chord- 
recognition,  and  of  the  perceiving  both  of  a  bass  and  of  the  inner 
parts  of  a  harmony. 

It  should  now  be  shewn  that,  in  almost  every  case,  the  Dominant- 
chord,  s,  t,  r1,  precedes  that  of  the  Tonic,  d,  n,  s,  at  the  end  of  a  piece, 

and   it  should   further  be    explained   that   when   any 

The  Perfect        r          ••'•*,  j     •     J.T.-  /•          T.       .Li- 

Cadence  phrase  in  its  course  ends  in  this  way  (i.e.,  when  the 

Dominant  chord  is  followed  by  that  of  the  Tonic),  the 
progression  is  called  a  Perfect  Cadence  (or  Full  Close).     The  mental 

*  The  key  should  be  constantly  varied. 


82 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


effect  of  a  Perfect  Cadence  is  one  of  completion  or  conclusion,  and 
is  analogous  to  the  "  full-stop  "  in  literature,  e.g. : — 

Andante. ••  On  the  Banks  of  Allan  Water." 


It  will  remembered,  moreover,  that  in  the  melodies  that  have 
up  to  the  present  been  given  as  Sight-singing  and  Dictation  exercises, 

the  first  phrase  has  generally  ended  upon  one  of  the 
Cadencef"  syllables,  Soh,  Te,  or  Eay.  These  notes  when  sounded 

together  form  the  Soh,  or  Dominant,  chord,  as  has  already 
been  pointed  out  above,  and  a  phrase  ending  upon  a  Dominant  chord, 
or  having  as  its  last  melody-note  one  of  the  notes  of  the  Dominant 
chord,  viz.,  Soh,  Te,  or  Eay,  produces  an  effect  analogous  to  a  comma 
or  a  semi-colon,*  and  forms  what  is  known  as  the  Imperfect  Cadence 
(or  Half- Cadence),  e.g.  :— 

Allegro. 


Old  Lincolnshire  Song. 


The  teacher  should  now  frequently  test  the  pupil's  ear  in  the 
recognition  of  Perfect  and  Imperfect  Cadences  by  playing  him  tunes, 
or  portions  of  tunes,  in  which  such  Cadences  occur.  Further,  the 
melody-notes  of  the  Tonic  and  Dominant  chords  should  always 
be  recognized  and  named ;  in  other  words,  the  pupil  should  state 


*  Or  even  occasionally  to  a  point  of  interrogation. 


MUSICAL    APPBECIATION. 


83 


whether  the  root,  the  3rd  or  the  5th  of  the  chord  is  in  the  top 
part,  by  giving  the  Sol-fa  names  of  the  last  two  melody-notes 
of  the  phrase,  e.g.  :  Ray  to  Doh ;  Te  to  Doh ;  Doh1  to  Te ;  Doh 
to  Ray ;  etc. 

The  following  are  specimens  of  Sight-singing  tests  for  the  pupil 
Sight-singing,    to  sing  at  this  stage  :— 


1 
(1)  {:d    n   :—  :d    n   :s 

:s    f   :1  :d'    d1  :t  :—  d1  :1  :f    s   : 

PI  :d    s   :—  :t    d1  :— 

(2)  {|n    :r     d 

—  |s    :n     s    :—  |s    :t     r1   :d'    |1 

:t     d'  ?  || 

i 
(3)   /  ;d     d  SR  S8    s    :n 

:d    1   :1  :f    n  :r  :r     n   :f  :s    1   : 

t  :d'  t   :r':s    d1  :— 

(1)  Tunes,  similar  to  those  in  the  previous  Steps,  should 

be  constructed,  the  first  phrase  ending  with  r,  s,  t,  or  r1 
(consequently  implying  an  Imperfect  Cadence),  and  the 
final  phrase  with  d,  n,  s,  or  d1,  preceded  by  r,  s,  t,  or  r1 
(illustrating  the  idea  of  a  Perfect  Cadence). 

(2)  Simple  melodies  (such  as  National  tunes,  etc.),  written  in 

Sol-fa,  should  be  given  to  the  pupil,  who  should  be 
required  to  describe  the  Cadence  implied  at  the  end  of 
each  phrase  of  such  melodies. 


STEP  X  (a).     Half-pulse   Sound.— The   Staff  of  Three 

Lines   (continued). 

THE  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  10,  should  be  played  to  the  pupil  in 
the  usual  way,  answers  being  elicited  with  reference  to  the  character 
Listening  to  of  the  piece,  its  time,  and  the  duration  of  the  various 
the  tune.  sounds  contained  therein. 

When  the  pupil  has  realized  that  there  are  two  sounds 
to  every  pulse,  he  should  be  told  to  make  down-  and  up-arm- 
Rhythmic  movements  to  indicate  the  pulses,  and  short,  light, 
movements,  quick  steps  to  indicate  the  note-values,  taking  therefore 
two  steps  to  each  down  arm -movement  and  two  steps  to  each 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


upward  one.  This  should  be  varied  by  stepping  the  pulses  and 
clapping  the  note-values ;  two  claps  therefore  being  given  to 
every  step.* 


The  melody  of  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  should  now  be  sung 
or  played  by  the  teacher,  the  pupil  naming  the  sounds  to  the 
E  .  .  Sol-fa  syllables,  and  writing  them  in  his  book,  e.g. : — 

s  1  s  1  s  d1  t  1,  etc.  Bar-lines  should  then  be 
inserted  and  each  bar  divided  into  two  equal  parts  by  the  usual  dots, 
thus : —  s  1  :s  1  s  d1  :t  1  etc. 

Each  pulse  should  then  be  subdivided  by  means  of  a  single  dot, 
thus : —  8  -1  :s  -1  8  -d'  :t  -1  etc.,  by  which  means  the  half- 
pulse  sounds  in  the  tune  are  conveniently  indicated.  When  the  whole 
tune  has  been  completed  in  this  way,  it  should  be  phrased  and 
sung  by  the  pupil. 

The  name  ta-te-f  should  be  given  to  the  half-pulse  sound, 
and  its  notational  sign  for  it  (the  quaver)  shewn  thus : —  J*  The 
The  Time-  pupil  should  then  write  the  time-names  of  all  the 
name,  Ta-te,  sounds  in  the  tune  (or  a  phrase  or  two  of  it),  inserting 
bar-lines  and  the  necessary  dots  to  indicate  the 
pulses,  adding  a  line  underneath,  and  placing  the  notational  signs 
upon  it,  e.g.  :— 


ta  .te  :ta  .te 


I  ta  .t< 

far 


ta  .te  :ta  .te 


ta  .te  :ta  .te 


ta  .te  :ta  .te 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  played  by  the  teacher, 
Dictation          the  pupil  beating  the  time,  saying  the  time-names,  and 
writing  down  the  notational  signs  : — 


tests. 


*  These  suggested  Ehythmic  movements  are  similar  to  those  advocated  by 
M.  Jaques-Dalcroze  in  his  Ehythmic  Gymnastics,  but  the  teacher  is  advised  to  invent 
movements  suitable  to  the  pupil  and  to  the  room  in  which  the  lesson  is  given.  It 
may  not  be  possible  to  make  any  rhythmic  movements  whatever,  and  in  this  case  the 
pupil  must  simply  clap  the  note-values,  and  count  or  beat  the  time. 

f  The  "a"  as  in  ask.     The  "  e"  as  in  French  (approximately  "eh  "  in  English). 

J  The  pupil  should  be  told  that  quavers  belonging  to  one  pulse  are  usually 
written  thus,  J~~J,  not  J*  ^ 


MUSICAL    APPEECIATION.  85 

(a)  Duration.          _ 


r_r 


<2>  faH-r     u-  I  f '    ILJ-  I  ILJ-  u-  I  r 

(b)  Pitch  and  Duration. 


J  J  JJJ  J 


The    pupil   should    now    be    shewn    the    pitch   of  Lah  in  its 

relation  to  Doh,  when  it  is  written  upon  the  staff  of 
Position  of       ,,        v 
Lah  on  staff     three  lines. 

of  three  lines.          If  Doh  is  on  the  bottom  line,  Me  will  be  on  the 
second  line,  Soh  upon  the  third,  and  Lah  just  above  the  third  line  : — 


-SOH- 


If  Doh  is  below  the  bottom  line,  Me  will  be  in  the  first  space,  Soh  in 
the  second  space,  and  Lah  on  the  line  above  this  space,  i.e.,  the 
third  line : — 


TJOTT 


The  following  and  similar  exercises  should  then  be  sung  to  the 
Sig-ht-sing-ing-.    Sol-fa  syllables,  and  afterwards  to  Lah  : — 


r   r  f 


DOH — 


M-^  _  «- 

I  •<  r  r  I 


T5OH" 


86  AUEAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

The  pitch  of  Te  and  Lah  should  now  be  shewn  in  relation  to  upper 
Doh ;  this  is  most  easily  done  upon  a  staff  of  two  lines,  as  follows  : — 

If  upper  Doh  is  placed  upon  the  top  line  of  this  staff,  Te  will  be 
Position  of  Te  underneath  it  and  Lah  upon  the  line  below,  e.g. : — 

and  Lah  from  DOHi-m  ' 

Upper  Doh.  CIZ^-LAH-,*- 

If  upper  Doh  is  placed  above  the  staff,  Te  will  be  on  the 
top  line  and  Lah  between  the  two  lines,  e.g. : — 


It  will  further  be  noticed  that  if  upper  Doh  is  on  a  line,  Soh  will 
be  in  a  space,  and  vice  versa,  e.g.  :  — 


The  following  and  similar  exercises  should  then  be  sung  to  the 
Sight-singing.    Sol-fa  syllables  and  to  Lah  :— 


DOH'- 

1 

I 

\—»  m  

i 

i 

,i 

\  ,      1 

—  *~  *H 

_— 

\    „ 

-*- 

1  r  r  1 

-e*  

T1 

M  —  H 

DQH| 

0 

| 

f  \  +  t 

,1    1 

1—  ™  —  *- 

0  1  ^ 

I    ^ 

[  r?  •*    II 

- 

F  M—  i 

5>  • 

T-r- 

r  1  1 

01  1 

h^  -fl 

| 

1 

i 

II., 

1 

^  ii 

r. 

^j 

^f 

i      i 

e 

y         9 

!            II 

(1)  Write  the  following  in  Sol-fa,  indicating  both  time  and 
Preparation,     pitch  :— 


DDK- 


(2)  Write  the  following  upon  a  three-line  staff.     Place  Doh 
in  turn  upon  the  lowest  line,  and  also  below  it : — 


{:d      |1  .s  :f  jn  :r  .d     s      :r      :'n      |f  ji  :r  ji  :f  Ji  |d      :— '   || 

(3)  Write  two  tunes  in  Sol-fa,  similar  to  those  in  the 
previous  lesson  ;  but  using  quavers  upon  the  unaccented 
beats.  The  following  is  a  specimen  : — 

/:d  .r  In      :n      :r      jn      :s      :d  .r  |n      :f  jn  :r      |d      :— 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


87 


STEP  X  (b).    Extension  of  Scale.—  Lower  Soh,  Lah  and  Te. 

THE  song,  "  One  Misty,  Moisty  Morning,"  should  be  learnt  by  heart. 
When  the  pupil  has  given  each  melody-note  its  Sol-fa  name, 
the  tune  should  be  sung  to  these  syllables 
theTune.  instead  of  the  words.  The  pupil's  attention 
should  be  drawn  to  the  fact  that  the  sounds 
Soh  and  Lah,  in  the  first  and  third  bars  respectively,  are 
below  the  ordinary  Doh.  The  exact  position  of  these 
syllables,  and  the  manner  in  which  they  are  written  (Soh,, 
Lahh  etc.,  or  s,  1,  etc.),  should  then  be  shewn  on  the 
Modulator,  as  found  in  the  margin.* 
Modulator  Exercises  should  afterwards  be  given,  including  the 
lower  Soh,  Lah,  and  Te  (s,  ,  1,  ,  t,).  At  this  point  in  the  pupil's 
Introduction  stucty  ^  wu^  ^e  opportune  to  introduce  definite  time- 
of  time-  patterns  into  his  Modulator  Exercises  :  and  in  those 

next  to  be  given,  such  patterns  as  the  following  would 
be  valuable,  as  demonstrating  the  particular  subject  of  Step  X  (a), 
viz.,  the  half-pulse  sound  :— 


doh' 
te 

lah 
soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 

te, 
lah, 
soh  i 


(a)   J      J"j        (b) 


(o) 


J        (d)   J      J~J   «TD  etc, 


The  following  is  a  specimen  of  the  employment  of  the  first  of  the 
above  patterns  :  — 


+2  .1    r*i 

4  J     J  • 


=5: 


Before  giving  the  pupil  an  exercise  such  as  the  foregoing  to  sing, 
it  is  generally  advisable  for  the  teacher  to  write  the  particular  time- 
pattern  to  be  used,  on  the  blackboard,  and  request  the  pupil  to 
tap  it  many  times.  The  teacher  should  also  be  careful  to  make  the 
exercises  rhythmical,  by  introducing  a  long  note  at  every  two,  three, 
or  four  bars,  according  to  the  length  of  the  phrase. 

The  following  and  similar  Sight-singing  tests  should  be  sung 
by  the  pupil  :  — 

(Key  C,  D  or  E.) 


{'•    |*  -  I'  '-  »  "    I'    >-  •   '"I"    "«!'    »    I*    || 
*  See  foot-notes  on  pages  67  and  80. 


88 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


(2)  {|'s   :l.t|d'   :n    IB   :f    |njr     j'n    :f.s|l   :s    |r    :n   |d  :- 
(Key  F  or  G.) 


(3)  (:s,   |1,  :t,  |d    :r   |n   :-  Is    :- |i    :fjn|r  :l,.t,|d    :— I— I 

(4)  /:'•,  Id   :d.r|n   :f   |8.1:s.f|n   :r'  |r   :njn|f   :s.l  Is   :s   |d  :-| 


(1)  The   tune,  "One   Misty,  Moisty  Morning,"  should   be 

pointed  from  memory  on  the  Modulator. 

Preparation.     (2)  Tunes  should  be  constructed  on  the  following  time 
schemes  and  written  in  Sol-fa  :— 

J 


J3J|  J3JJ 


- 


3J|  J  J3J3  J 


Dup 


(b) 
ile. 


J 


V 


J  j 


(3)  A  melody  should  be  written  in  Sol-fa  to  words,  such, 
e.g.,  as  the  Nursery  rhyme,  "  Baa,  baa,  Black  Sheep." 


STEP  XI  (a).     One-and-a-half-pulse  Sound.— The  Staff 

of  Five  Lines. 

THE    pupil   should   be    requested   to   beat    time  as  the   Rhythmic 
Exercise,  No.  11,  is  being  played.     The  teacher  should  then  sing  the 

melody  of  the  first  two  bars  slowly,  with  the  pulses 
tirne1"8'  strongly  and  clearly  marked.  Afterwards  the  pupil 

should  sing  the  same  passage,  while  the  teacher  beats 
the  time.  As  a  result  of  this  proceeding  the  pupil  should  discover 
that  the  sound  on  the  first  beat  of  the  bar  is  prolonged  into  the 
second.  Before  this  latter  beat  is  completed,  however,  a  shorter 
sound  is  heard ;  this  occurs  exactly  at  the  half  of  the  second  beat, 
the  sound  first  heard  being  consequently  of  the  duration  of  a  beat 
and  a-half. 

As  many  pupils  find  a  certain  difficulty  in  perceiving  and 
executing  correctly  this  particular  time-division  (viz.,  J .  £)  the 
Practice  on  teacher  should  give  much  attention  to  it.  As  in  previous 
thh  ^P6"3;11^"  Steps,  the  pupil  should  clap  the  note-values  of  the 
sound.  Rhythmic  Exercise  while  marching  to  the  pulses. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION.  89 

Afterwards  he  should  keep  time  by  making  arm-movements 
as  on  page  83,  and  indicate  the  note-values  by  long  and  short 
steps.  If  these  last  rhythmic  movements  be  found  too  difficult  the 
pupil  should  confine  himself  to  the  first  of  these  exercises.  In 
clapping  the  time-values  it  is  helpful  to  press  the  hands  tightly 
together  on  the  pulses  where  the  sounds  are  held  over. 

The  teacher  should  now  play  the  melody  of  the  Rhythmic 
Exercise  slowly,  and  request  the  pupil  to  write  it  down  in  Sol-fa 
(directions  being  given  as  before  for  the  syllables 
to  be  spaced  out  and  arranged  in  pairs,  thus  : — 
s,  d  s,  d  s,  d,  etc.)  Bar-lines  should  then  be  added  and  a  short 
upright  line  placed  before  the  third  pulse  of  each  bar,  thus : — 
s,  d  s,  |d  s,  d  etc.  The  usual  dots  should  then  be  inserted  in 
order  to  divide  each  half- bar  and  to  indicate  the  pulses,  the  second  and 
fourth  pulses  being  subdivided  by  means  of  a  single  dot,  to  mark  the  half- 
pulses,  thus: — s<  d  :  .sild  :  .s,  d  :  .r  |n  :  .r  etc.  It  will  be  seen  that 
the  first  half  of  the  second  and  fourth  pulses  is  now  a  blank  space. 
To  indicate  that  the  first  and  third  notes  last  one-and-a-half  pulses 
horizontal  lines  are  drawn  through  this  half-space  to  show  its 
continuation: —  s,  d  :-.s,|d  :-.s,|d  :-.r  |n  :-.r  etc. 

The  pupil  should  now  sing  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  from  his  own 
copy,  and  should  beat  the  time  as  he  does  so. 


The  time-name  Taa  a-te*  should  be  given  to  the  one-and-a-half- 
pulse  sound,  and  the  notational  sign  for  it  shewn,  thus : —  J  Jj  or  J .  £ 
Time-name  The  pupil  should  write  down  all  the  time-names  of 
Taa  a-te\  the  tune  (or,  at  axiy  rate,  a  phrase  or  two  of  it),  and 
indicate  the  note-values  upon  a  line  underneath  : — 


|  taa 

1-r 


taa  a-te  taa  a-te 


taa  a-te  taa  a-te 


etc. 


The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  played  by  the 
Dictation  teacher,  the  pupil  beating  the  time,  saying  the 
tests.  time-names,  and  writing  down  the  corresponding 

*  The  teacher  is  advised  to  introduce  the  sign  for  Taa  a-t6  by  first  shewing  the 
pupil  the  Taa  ta-t6  that  he  is  already  familiar  with,  J  J"H.  The  next  step  should 
be  the  crotchet  tied  to  the  quaver,  e.g. —  J  J"j,  the  alternative  method  of  writing 
this  J  .  J*  being  afterwards  shewn. 


90 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


notational   signs.*      Directions  as   to  giving    these    tests    will    be 
found  on  page  55. 

(a)  Duration. 


(1)^U_£3_^ 


U 


(b)  Pitch  and  Duration. 


J  •   J|  J  •   /  J  '  || 


sro 


ft 


n 


& 


S<d: 
[iff 


JF77'J|r  rrrcHJ  J'B 


The  pupil  should  now  learn  to  read  from  the  normal  staff  of  five 
lines  ;  this  is  effectively  introduced  to  his  notice  by  the 

ILJ  ...  i  *^ 

Staff.  combination  of  the  staff  of  three  lines  with  that  of  two 

lines  as  used  in  connexion  with  Soh  and  upper  Doh 
in  Step  X  (a) : — 


-H 1 J 1 1 J ^ DOH'      gg 

J-"^    j    •g^::f:::f:::r::::::::::  j^g 


DOH' H 1 •]-- 

<»)  »2£fc 


(b) 


§ 


^^^ 


—SOH     -49 
—  ME <S£- 


—DOH — © 


It  will  be  seen  at  (b)  that  if  Doh  is  on  a  line,  Me  will  be  on  the 
next  line  above,  Soh  on  the  line  next  above  that,  and  upper  Doh  in 
the  space  next  but  one  above  that  line.  If  Doh  is  in  a  space,  as 
at  (a),  Me  will  be  in  the  next  space  above,  Soh  in  the  space  above 
that,  and  upper  Doh  upon  the  line  above  the  next  space. 

The  "  Staff-modulator,"  as  shewn  in  the  margin, 
should  now  be  written  on  the  blackboard,f  and  the 
teacher  should  point  easy  exercises  built  upon  the 
Tonic  (or  Doh)  chord,  and  also  upon  all  the  various 


DOH 


Sight- 
singingr. 


degrees  of  the  scale  in  stepwise  succession. 

Exercises  such  as  the  following  should  then  be  sung  by  the  pupil, 
first  to  Sol-fa  syllables,  and  afterwards  to  Lah  :  — 

*  It  is  strongly  recommended  that,  as  a  preliminary  study  for  these  tests,  the 
teacher  should  play  single  bars,  introducing  the  Taa  a-t6  at  different  parts  of  the 
bar,  e.g.:—  (a)  .  (b)_  (c) 


etc. 

The  pupil  should  identify  these  by  saying  their  time-names  while  beating  the  time. 

t  The  teacher  should  vary  the  pitch  of  Doh  from  time  to  time,  and  on  no 
account  should  he  associate  the  Doh  as  indicated  on  this  "  Open  Staff "  with  the 
Treble  clef,  thus  erroneously  regarding  this  Doh  as  representing  E.  The  actual  pitch 
depends,  of  course,  upon  the  clef  used.  The  pupil  will  be  introduced  to  the  idea  of 
the  clef  in  the  next  Step. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


91 


(1) 


(2) 


(3) 


(4) 


1 

F*=FI 

1       2 

•  I 

1 

.  r 

F*=^ 

r^ 

i 

[__l  —  J_ 

—  —  iq 

zj-1- 

—  J- 

i3   • 

DOT1— 

—  |—  J 

33E 

-f—s- 

-^  — 

^~^ 

=^ 

[J      -1  | 

h- 

DOH  —  1 

7*L_ 

J      ' 

Lfczfd 

y=£d 

—  ^  

i  —  3a 

^j 

'  l      i 

— 

•  -i        r 

1 

j 

9  • 

A         ^*         ^ 

^      J 

1 

DOH  — 

^J_^_*J 

^    J 

M  

|  

m 


3 


5l=F 


When  such  exercises  as  the  above  can  be  read  with  fair  fluency, 

the  position  of  Doh  should  be  changed  upon  the  Staff- modulator, 

DO 

thus  : —      (a) 


(b) 


(o) 


POTT 


and  the  teacher  should  point  many  exercises  of  his  own  with  Doh  in 
turn  in  the  positions  shewn  above. 

Exercises  in  phrase-form  such  as  the  following,  should  also  be 


gven  :  — 

DOH*— 


(i) 


(2) 


(3) 


F 


J 


r 


r 


DOH— 

^^^ 

=?^^ 

^=^ 

^ 

J        J        J 

1  '  

DOHL 


(1)  Draw  a  five-line  Staff-modulator,  placing  Doh  in  any  of 


Preparation. 


the  above  four  positions,  viz.- 


(a) 


(o) 


_LDOH__I 


-OOH- 


and  sing  impromptu  tunes,  pointing  at  the  same  time 
upon  this  Staff-modulator. 

(2)  Write  the  following  on  the  five-line  staff,  placing  Doh 

in  turn  in  each  of  the  above  four  positions  : — 

(a)dnsnd'snssnsnd 

(b)  d     r     n      s      d1     t     d1     s      n     f      s     n     d 

(3)  Write  the  following  in  Sol-fa  : — 

i         i 

DOH1 


rrir  i*' %  Ji*1 


92 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  XI  (b).    The  Interrupted  Cadence.— First  Step  in 

Absolute  Pitch. 

THE  tune,  "  When  little  Fred,"  should  be  learnt  in  the  usual  way. 
The  melody  should  afterwards  be  sung  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables  in 
Learning-  the  place  of  the  words,  answers  being  elicited  with  reference 
tune-  to  the  character,  note- values,  etc.,  of  the  tune. 

The  teacher  should  also  shew  that  at  bar  23  a  Perfect  Cadence 

is  expected,  but  that  it  is  interrupted  by  a  chord 
Cadence.  *  different  from  that  of  the  Tonic.  When  such  an  effect 

is  produced  it  is  called  an  Interrupted  Cadence.  The 
chord  or  combination  of  sounds  used  in  this  case  is  that  of  Lah, 
The  Sub-  Doh,  Me,  and  it  is  named  the  Lah,  or  Sub-mediant, 
mediant  chord.  This  chord,  containing  as  it  does  two  notes 

of  the  Tonic  chord  (Doh  and  Me),  becomes  a  very 
natural  substitute  for  that  of  the  Tonic  when  it  is  especially 
desired  to  avoid  a  Full  Close,  or  Perfect  Cadence,  as  in  the 
following  instance  :-  „  God  m  the  King  „ 


1       ,      — ±-to 
j   !lj;   i 


sa 


^ 


The  following  and  similar  exercises  should  be  pointed  on  the 
Sight-  Sol-fa  Modulator,  notes  of  the  Sub-mediant  chord 

sing-ing-.  being  frequently  introduced  :— 

(Key  C  or  D.) 


d    n    s    n    d1   1 


d1   1    n    f    •    n    r  '  n    d    d1  1    d1  r1  d1 


The  teacher  should  also  point  exercises  upon  the  following  time- 
patterns.     (See  Step  X  (b)  )  :— 


(l) 


etc. 


(2)       J. 


etc. 


The   following  and   similar   time   and    tune   tests   should   also 


be  sung  : — * 


*  Further  Sight-singing  exercises  for  use  at  this  and  succeeding  stages  will 
be  found  in  "  Melodies  and  Tests  for  Sight-singing  and  Musical  Dictation,"  by 
F.  C.  Field  Hyde,  or  in  "  Easy  and  Melodious  Sight-singing  Exercises,"  by  Edith 
Rowland.  (Joseph  Williams.  Limited.) 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


93 


(Key  E  or  F.) 


:s,    d     :ti     Id      :r       n      :s 
(Key  C  or  D.) 

r     :-'  |n     :s       1     :d' 

n      :r       d 

(2)  |:n       s      :l.t  :d'      t 

:—    :1       s      :f.n  :r       n 

-'II 

! 

:r      |n     :-.f    s      :d'    |1      :d' 

n      :r     |n  .f  :s       d      :1 

s      :n  .r    d 

(Key  F  or  G.) 


(4)  {Id      :n      Id      :1,      d      :n      Id      :t,      s.f:n.r|d      :n     II,     :d      Id      : 


The  Sub-mediant  chord  should  now  be  played  by  the  teacher  and 

its  notes  sung  in  any  order  by  the  pupil  in  a  manner 

effect  of  similar  to  that  described  on  page  81.      The  frequently 

Sub-mediant     rather  sad  mental  effect  of  the  chord  should  be  carefully 

noticed,  as  well  as  its  weaker  effect  as  compared  with 

the  strong  Tonic,  Dominant,  and  Sub-dominant  chords. 

In  order  to  demonstrate  this,  the  teacher  should  play  passages 
such  as  the  following,  dwelling  somewhat  upon  the  chord  marked  x 
in  each  example  (i.e.,  upon  the  Sub-mediant  chord) :— 

x  i  f\  _  x 


At  this  stage  of  the  pupil's  progress,  much  simple  music  should 
be  played  to  him,  not  only  to  cultivate  his  feeling  for  pulse-regularity, 
accent  and  phrase,  but  in  order  that  his  aural  perception  may  be 
developed  more  fully  and  perfectly  by  his  observing  the  variety  and 
contrast  afforded  by  tno  chord -progressions  forming  the  various 
cadences  hitherto  studied.  By  this  means  he  will  gain  the  power 
not  only  of  feeling,  but  of  knowing  what  takes  place  in  the  course 
of  the  music. 


94  AUttAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

• 

The  pupil  will  have  noticed  that  the  pitch  of  Doh  varies ; 
sometimes  it  is  high  and  sometimes  low.  Up  to  the  present, 
pjxed  however,  the  particular  pitch  selected  for  Doh  has  not 
(or  absolute)  concerned  the  pupil,  his  attention  having  been  drawn 
merely  to  the  pitch-relationship  borne  by  the  different 
sounds  of  a  key  to  the  one  selected  at  the  beginning  of  an  exercise 
or  song.  The  exact  pitch  of  the  various  sounds  should  now  be 
more  carefully  noticed  and  definitely  localized.  This  is  done  most 
easily  by  endeavouring  to  remember  that  of  one  sound  first,  and 
finding  others  from  this.*  _o /r 

The  teacher  should  commence  by  playing  Middle  C   (m — 


telling  the  pupil  that  this  particular  sound  is  named  by  a  letter  of  the 
alphabet,  C ;  it  has  an  even  more  definite  name,  viz.,  Middle  (7.f 
The  pupil  should  then  be  told  to  sing  it,  and  then  try  to  remember  it. 
It  should  now  be  explained  that  the  pitch  of  every  sound  heard 
is  known  by  a  certain  letter  of  the  alphabet ;  for  example  :— 

If  Middle  C  is  the  pitch  of  Doh- 

The  pitch  of  Bay  will  be  D. 

Me        „  E. 

Fah      „  F. 

Soh      „  G. 

Lah      „  A. 

Te        „  B. 

„          Upper  Doh  will  be  C1,  and  so  on. 


*  Some  persons,  even  quite  young  children,  possess  the  faculty  of  localizing 
sounds  in  "  absolute "  pitch  in  a  remarkable  degree,  without  the  slightest  effort. 
It  cannot  be  denied,  however,  that  when  in  the  course  of  the  pupil's  ear-training 
studies  the  pitch-names  of  the  various  sounds  are  constantly  referred  to  in  addition  to 
the  Sol-fa  names,  or  when  he  is  far  enough  advanced  to  use  only  the  pitch-names, 
(that  is,  when  his  feeling  for  tonality  has  been  established),  the  perception  of "  absolute" 
pitch  becomes  acquired  in  a  manner  which,  to  most  people,  is  almost  incredible. 
This  perception  being  really  a  form  of  musical  memory,  it  would  seem  that  when 
it  is  possessed  without  effort  we  have  an  extreme  instance  of  what  is  known  as 
Spontaneous  Memory,  which  is  not  unlike  Voluntary  or  Spontaneous  Attention. 
When,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  acquired  only  by  an  effort  of  the  will  after  long 
association,  we  have  an  extreme  instance  of  Volitional  Memory.  This  Volitional 
Memory  often  develops  into  Spontaneous  Memory  in  the  same  way  that  Voluntary 
Attention  becomes,  in  the  course  of  time,  ^Ton-voluntary  Attention. 

t  The  teacher  should  take  care  that  the  pitch  of  the  piano  that  he  uses  is 
that  of  the  French  Normal  Diapason.  He  should  also  explain  to  the  pupil  the 
meaning  of  the  term  Middle  as  applied  to  this  particular  C. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


95 


It  will  therefore  be  seen  that  the  first  seven  letters  of  the 
alphabet  are  used  to  indicate  the  absolute  pitch  of  the  different 
sounds. 

In  order  to  become  familiar  with  the  pitch-names  and  to  associate 
them  with  their  actual  sounds,  exercises  should  be  sung  from  a 
Modulator  made  of  these  names,  as  shewn  in  the  margin.* 
The  teacher  should  first  impress  the  sound  of  Middle  C 
upon  the  pupil's  mind,  making  him  sing  it,  and 
afterwards  request  him  to  sing  the  scale  slowly,  using 
- m  the  pitch-names  instead  of  the  Sol-fa  syllables.  Skips 
from  C  to  G  should  then  be  sung,  leading  on  to  skips 
on  the  Tonic  (C,  E,  G),  Sub-dominant  (F,  A,  C1)  and 
Dominant  (G,  B,  D1)  chords. 


-  C1  - 

-d1 

-  B   - 

-  t 

-  A    - 

-1 

-  G   - 

-  s 

-  F   - 

-  f 

_  E   - 

-m 

-  D   - 

-  r 

-  C    - 

-  d 

The  teacher  should  next  take  Middle  C  as  Doh,  and  request  the 
pupil  to  give  the  letter-names  of  the  various  sounds  of  the  scale  as 
they  are  sung  to  him  in  Sol-fa.  In  giving  this  exercise  the  teacher 
should  begin  with  the  notes  of  the  Tonic  chord,  proceeding  to  the 
other  degrees  of  the  scale  as  the  pupil  progresses.  Afterwards, 
sounds  in  the  key  of  C  should  be  played,  and  the  pupil  required  to 
give  them  their  letter-names  instead  of  their  Sol-fa  names.  Of  course 
the  pupil  may  think  in  Sol-fa  first,  but  he  must  give  the  letter-names 
in  his  answers. 

(1)  Write  the  letter-names  of  the  following,  regarding  the 
Preparation     pitcn  of  Doh  as  Middle  C  in  every  case  : — 

(1)  d    n    s       (2)  d    r    n       (3)  n    s    d       (4)  d    n    s    d1 
(5)  f    n    r    d       (6)  d    f    1    d1       (7)  s    t    r1 

(2)  Write  the  letter-names  of  the  notes  of  the  Tonic  chord, 

the   Dominant   chord,   and    the    Sub-dominant  chord 
(Key  C). 

(3)  Translate  the  following  into  Sol-fa,  regarding  C  in  each 

case  as  Doh  : — 

(1)    c     d     e     f     e     g     a     b     e1 

(2)    e     e     d     e     f     a     e1    g     b     d1     e1 
(3)cgfclgagbc'agefe     d<^ 

*  The  Aural   Culture  "  Combined "  Modulator  (large   size   for  class,  miniature 
edition  for  home  use)  will  be  found  useful.     (Joseph  Williams,  Limited.) 


96  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP   XII  (a).    Rests.— Fixed  (or  Absolute)  Pitch  applied 

to  the  Staff. 

THE  Rhythmic  Exercise,  No.  12,  should  be  played  through  in  the 
usual  way,  and  the  pupil  requested  to  beat  time.  The  moments  of 
silence  or  "rest"  should  be  noticed,  and  the  pupil 
snou^  march  to  the  exercise  as  it  is  played  again,  the 
note-values  being  indicated  by  clapping,  the  rests  by  the 
hands  being  thrown  apart.  Other  rhythmic  movements  may  be 
devised  and  practised,  similar  to  those  suggested  in  previous  lessons. 
The  pupil  should  now  write  down  the  melody  of  the  tune  in 
Sol-fa,  directions  being  given  for  the  syllables  to  be  written  in 
E  t  t  pairs,  thus  : —  d  r  d  n  d  f  ;  bar  lines  should  then 

be  inserted,  and  each  bar  divided  into  three  spa/jes  by 
means  of  dots  : —  {'•&  |*  '•  :d  |n  :  :d  |f  :  :d  |,  etc.,  the  second  space 
in  each  bar  being  left  blank  to  indicate  the  one-pulse  silence  or  "  rest." 
The  pupil  should  now  sing  the  Rhythmic  Exercise  from  his  own  copy, 
and  should  beat  time  as  he  sings. 

The  time-name,  Saa,  should  be  given  to  the  one-pulse  rest  (it  will 
be  noticed  that  the  consonant  S  is  substituted  for  the  T  of  the 
The  Time-  time-name,  Taa),  and  the  notational  sign  for  it  shewn 
name  for  one-  thus —  F  or  £.  The  time-names  of  all  the  sounds  and 
*  rests  of  the  piece  (or  of  a  phrase  or  two  of  it)  should 
now  be  written,  with  their  notational  signs  on  a  horizontal  line 
underneath,  as  in  previous  Steps  : — 

:taa      taa    :saa   :taa    I  taa    :saa   :taa     taa    :saa 

etc. 

-Hr  r  r  Ir  r  Mr  r 


The  following  and  similar  exercises  should  be  written  down  by 

the  pupil  from  the  teacher's  dictation  :  — 
Dictation 


t  Daration 


\r  f  r\r  ir  ,-  I  r  "  r  I  r  '  ~H 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


97 


(b)  Pitch  and  Duration. 


(1) 


(2) 


The  above  tests  may  be  effectively  prepared  for  by  the  teacher  playing  single 
bars  including  one-pulse  rests,  e.g.  :  — 

(.)  (b)  (0)  (d) 


CfiHl- 

1  P- 

—  J  —  F-n 

t=^=t 

-—J  p~ 

~r  —  T~ 

-J  —  p  —  -j  —  jK- 

-H  —  F4—  • 

DOH—  1  —  J  

J          II 

DOH1— 

-*-a  r-s- 

k-=r-    . 

i  1  M 

j 

T  r  ^  r 

r    ^     •*    r   -^ 

1  J  J 

*  ^  J  r   !  r  r  r 

f2- 

(i) 


J 


(0) 


(2) 


J 


J  J 


J     r     J 


(g) 
r    JllJ    J 


J      J 


J    J    J 


J 


The  rests  should  be  introduced  at  different  parts  of  the  bar  in  turn,  and  the  pupil 
should  respond  by  saying  the  time-names,  as  in  previous  Steps. 


The  next  fact  that  should  be  presented   is  that  the  fixed  or 
,   absolute  pitch  of  a  sound  can  be  indicated  on  the  staff 

aJTieS 

applied  to        by  placing  the  letter-name  connected  with  that  sound 

s  a  *          upon   a  line,   or  in  a  space.     For  instance,   if  it  is 

desired  to  indicate  the  pitch  of  Middle  C,  the  letter-name  C  may  be 

placed  on  one  of  the  five  lines  of  the  staff,  thus  : —    EE 

— C-(Middle-C> — = 

It  will  therefore  follow  that  if  Middle  C  is  fixed  to  a  line,  and 
that  line  represents  Doh,  the  space  above  it  must  be  Kay  and  bear 
the  letter-name  D.  The  line  above  it,  being  Me,  will  bear  the 
name,  E,  and  so  on.  The  pitch  names  of  the  lines  and  spaces  of 
the  normal  staff,  if  C  is  placed  upon  the  bottom  line,  will  therefore 
be  as  follows  : — 


The  teacher  should  now  ask  the  pupil  to  sing  a  scale  starting 
from  Middle  C,  and  direct  him  to  proceed  upwards  as  far  as  possible 

beyond  the  Upper  Doh.      He   will  probably  be  able 

_ 

to  reach  tne  higher  F  —  /u    |         and  will  by  this  means 


The  Range 
vohje. 


realize  that  the  compass  of  his  voice  will  lie  between  Middle  C 
and  this  F. 


96  AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 

If  the  above  (lettered)  staff  be  now  examined,  it  will  be  seen 
that  to  indicate  the  pitch  of  high  F  another  line  will  have  to  be  added, 
necessitating  a  six-line  staff,  thus  :— 

The  Six-line  -  - — D — B — F~ 

staff.  A — B     v 


This  form  of  staff  being  inconvenient  and  difficult  to  read  from,  it  is 
the  custom  for  it  to  be  reduced  to  a  normal  five-line  staff  again  by 
Middle  C  writing  Middle  C  upon  a  short  line,  thus  : — * 

written  as  a        f  ||  u     c     1>— E — F~ 

Leger  line,          f  II         D     ^     F — »     rt  — — 

This  short  line  is  called  a  Leger  line. 

The  names  of  the  lines  of  the  staff,  instead  of  being  C,  E,  G,  B,  D, 
as  on  page  97,  are  therefore  now  E,  G,  B,  D,  F,  while  the  spaces, 
instead  of  being  D,  F,  A,  C,  are  now  F,  A,  C,  E  :— 

j! ^_E= 


It  should  now  be  explained  that  a  note  placed  upon  one  of  the 
lines  or  spaces  of  the  above  five-line  staff  takes  the  name  of  that  line 


or  space,  e.g. : —  =&=  fj  r*          Further,  that  it  is  necessary 

-«?-  G        C1 


for  the  name  and  pitch  of  only  one  line  to  be  specially  indicated,  that 
The  letter-  °f  eacn  °f  tne  other  lines  or  spaces  being  found  from  it. 
name  G  placed  As  Middle  C  does  not  actually  occur  upon  this  staff, 
determine  but  only  as  a  leger  line  below  it,  another  line  has  to  be 
Pitch.  used  for  this  purpose,  and  custom  has  selected  the  G 

next  above  Middle  C,  i.e.,  the  second  line  of  the  staff.     This  could,  of 

course,  be  shewn  thus  :—      =zg:=         :  but  this  letter  G,  after  having 

o 

The  G,  OP         appeared  in  various  shapes  at  different  periods,  is  now 

always  found  in  the  following  ornamented  form : — 
This  ornamental  G  is  called  the  G  (or  Treble)  "cleft 

The  pupil   should   practise   making  the    G  clef,   first  on   one 


\j 

line  and  then  on  the  staff,  thus  : —     (jK and 


*  For  the  reason  of  this,  the  teacher  is  referred  to  Chapter  II  of  "  Eudiments  of 
Music  "  (Stewart  Macpherson). 

t  (Fr.  "  clef,"  a  key) ;  therefore,  the  key  to  the  riddle  of  the  staff.  The 
historical  development  of  the  clef  signs  is  interestingly  described  in  "  The  Child's 
Pianoforte-book,"  by  Mr.  Keatley  Moore. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


99 


The  following  lines  and  spaces  should  then  be  named  by  the 
pupil,  and  the   teacher  should  give  some  practice   of  this  kind  at 
many  subsequent  lessons,  until  fluency  in   naming  is 


Exercise  .     -,       * 

on  the  acquired  :—  * 

Pitch  names. 


j. 


_ 

r  *    j      j 


f          .     I 

r     J 


_ 

r 


The  following  and  similar  Sight-reading  tests  should  be  sung, 
first  to  Sol-fa,  and  then  to  Lah : — 


(1) 


f 


3=F 


-^ 


5 


£S 


JJJ-  N^ 


3 


^ 


•^r 


(*) 


/k   r 

1  —  1~ 

1    J.    J^   J    r  1 

-V-  SE 

-p  — 

—  1  h- 

,  P- 

1  H  2  »-=  «=  »  :  «-=  «  =  :  »— 

V    * 

J     J    '^i.    -1 

N.B. — When  the  G  clef  is  used  the  pitch  of  Doh  is  invariably  Middle  C,  unless 


the  clef  is  followed  by  signs  called  sharps  or  flats,  thus : —  "7JT  # — -  or  i^Byj—  ;   the 
purpose  of  which  will  be  explained  in  future  Steps. 


Preparation. 


(1)  Name  the  following  lines  and  spaces  : — 

4  r  r  r  J  j  r  r  r  J^^ 

*>  -*- 


(2)  Indicate  the  following  in  Staff-notation,  using  the  G  clef, 

and  writing  each  note  as  a  crotchet :  (i)  Middle  C, 
(ii)  clef-line  G,  (iii)  E  above  Middle  C,  (iv)  E  above 
clef-line  G,  (v)  C  above  clef-line  G. 

(3)  Write  the  following  similarly  in  Staff-notation,  using  the 

G  clef,  and  regarding  Middle  C  as  Doh  : — 

(a)  d     n     s     n     d     1     f     n     s     d1     1     t     d1 

(b)  n    r    d    1     s     n    s    d1    n1    f    n1    r1    s    d1 


*  Excellent  material  for  the  naming  of  notes  will  be  found  in  Mrs.  Curwen'a 
Child  Pianist "  (Grade  I,  Book  I). 


100 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  XII  (b).      Rests.— The  position  of  the  Dominant  and 
Sub-dominant  chords  on  the  Staff.— The  Major  Scale. 

THE  song,  "There  were  Two  Birds,"  should  be  learnt  in  the 
Learning1  the  usual  way,  and  afterwards  sung  to  the  Sol-fa  syllables, 
tune,  etc.  (^  previous  Steps.) 

The  following  and  similar  Modulator  tests  should  then  be 
Modulator  pointed  by  the  teacher  and  sung  by  the  pupil,  as  it  is 
tests.  most  desirable  that  he  should  have  plenty  of  practice 

upon  the  matter  of  previous  lessons  :— 

(1)  With  single-pulse  notes.     (Key  C  or  D.) 


d     1 


•     d1     1      f    -n^j-   '   n     8     d'    r     t 

(2)  With  the  time-pattern  J  .     J*  (Key  F  or  G.) 


8    :-  .1  I  s     :-  .f  I  r     :- 


f     :-  .n  I  r     :-  .t,    d     :— 


—^ 

(3)  With  the  time-pattern  J"j     J    (Key  F  or  G.) 


!: 


:n  .r 


d    :t,.l    8,     :l,.t,    d     :r  Ji     s     :s  .1     s      :f  .n 


:r  .d  It,     :l,.t,    d 


A  Staff-modulator  should   now  be   drawn   as   in   the   margin, 
the  position  of  the  Dominant  chord  being  shewn  on  the  right,  and 
The  Staff-        ^hat  of  the  Sub-dominant  chord  on  the  left.     Exercises 
Modulator.       similar  to  the  above  should  then  be  pointed  on  this 
Modulator  for  the  pupil  to  sing,  the  Sol-fa  names  being 
first  used,  and  afterwards  the  syllable  Lah* 
The  following  and  similar  tests  should  be  sung  to  Sol-fa,  and 
Sight-singing1,     afterwards  to  Lah  : — 


•>  Jir  Jir  r 


(2) 

RU 

I 

E3E 

-  Y  —i  1    J 

W=^= 

-j^ 

E^ 

1    J    J     !  1 

—  i  —  3i 

if 

=3F 

J    '    ^  *  «  >  s,^  

-1  — 

*       -J- 

*  It  is  also  useful  to  sing  the  actual  pitch-names. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


101 


After  a  certain  amount  of  facility  in  Sight-singing  has  been 
gained  from  practice  on  the  Sol-fa  and  Staff-modulators,  the  teacher 
should  request  the  pupil  to  notice,  by  examining  the 
Semitones.  Sol-fa  Modulator,  that  the  distance  between  adjacent 
degrees  of  the  scale  is  not  always  the  same.  For 
instance,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  distance  between  Doh  and  Ray, 
or  Ray  and  Me  is  larger  than  that  between  Me  and  Fah ;  also 
that  the  distance  between  Fah  and  Soh,  Soh  and  Lah,  or  Lah 
and  Te  is  likewise  larger  than  that  between  Te  and  Doh.  The 
smaller  distances  or  intervals  in  the  scale  are  called  semitones, 
and  the  larger  ones  whole  tones.  The  scale  will  thus  be  seen  to 
contain  two  semitones  and  five  whole  tones,  the  semitones  occurring 
between  the  third  and  fourth  and  seventh  and  eighth  degrees,  and 
the  tones  between  all  the  others. 

When  the  tones  and  semitones  occur  in  a  scale  in  the  above 
order,  the  scale  is  said  to  be  a  Major  Scale. 

The  Major  Scale  may  therefore  be  regarded  as  a  '*  ladder,"  or 
group  of  eight  steps,  as  shewn  below  : — 


doh' 
te 


soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 


It  will  also   be   seen  by  the  above  illustration  that,  in  the   scale 
starting  upon  C  as  Doh,  the  semitones  occur  between  E  and  F,  and 


lOii 


AUEAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


B  and   C,  a  fact  which  should   be   strongly  impressed  upon  the 
pupil's  notice. 

The  Major  Scale  of  C  should  now  be  written  on  the  staff,  and  the 
semitones  indicated  by  a  slur  as  below  : — 


3 


3s? 


£E£ 


p 


It  will  be  observed  that  all  the  intervals  look  the  same  on  the  staff, 
and  the  pupil  must  in  consequence  always  make  an  effort  to 
remember  the  position  of  the  semitonic  steps.  The  above  scale 
should  be  both  written  and  sung  by  the  pupil. 

His  attention  should  further  be  drawn  to  the  fact  that  the  Major 
Scale  is  divisible  into  two  equal  parts,  each  containing 
two  tones  and  a  semitone.  These  groups  of  four 
notes  are  called  Tetrachords  (Gr.  tetra,  four,  chorde, 

a  String)    e.O.  : —        n     Lower  tetrachord.     Upper  tetrachord^ 


The 
Tetrachord. 


The  scale  should  finally  be  sung  and  written  rhythmically  in 
Rhythmical  duple,  triple  and  quadruple  times,  various  time- 
Scale-singringr.  patterns  being  introduced,  similar  to  the  following  :— 


(1)              n     1 
Dnnln          V 

| 

>l   1 

1 

- 

>' 

Time       «B  — 

—  T 

=| 

(- 

J 

-^ 

—  ^~ 

-^  ^~ 

-^ 

—  K 

—j- 

i 

j- 

r 

—  j— 

c/     *^~ 

^ 

—  * 

L|  1  1 

4 

i- 

V 

(2)           t    | 

mi                   fl 

>l    1 

>  1 

Triple      -Jf— 

r 

—  I- 

1  1— 

—  1- 

—  j^- 

-£;-!  F- 

=5 

— 

—  \- 

— 

t 

1— 

—  r-  • 

Time.      (ff)  —  -j- 

<J     ~^~ 

' 

' 

1         1     1 

i 

|H 

- 

0 

J 

(3)               I 

>l    1 

.^ 

>| 

yuadruple  -J*  —  

nv                    rfyl\           1  — 

—  f 

«^- 

-I— 

—  j  — 

—  (- 

—  jjj- 

-f2  '"- 

—  < 

£3 

—  |— 

—  |  — 

• 

-- 

Time.      {9}  —  j- 

C/          ~^* 

—  i- 

r   r 

9 

f  — 

* 

— 

^ 

> 

> 

i 

> 

> 

Quadruple    V 
Time.      fe>— 

=£ 

-A 

-f 

^  • 

-»•- 

—\  

r  Jt 

»•- 

1- 

-v 

• 

=# 

~* 

-+ 

-r- 

^|  etc. 

Care  should  be  taken  that  the  final  note  comes  upon  the  accented  beat,  unless 
a  "  feminine  ending  "  is  desired. 


(1)  The  scale  of  C  should  be  written  upon  the  staff,  the 
semitones  being  indicated  by  slurs. 

(2)  Melodies  should  be  constructed  and  written  in 
Sol-fa,  and  also  on  the  staff  in  the  key  of  C. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


103 


ALTERNATIVE  (EASIER)  SONGS 
FOR  PITCH-LESSONS. 


STEP  I  (b). 

Words  by  L.  H. 


Stay-at-home  Doh. 


Introduction 

of 
Doh  and  Soh. 


Marcato. 


E.  E. 
cres.  5 


soh 


doh 


l     fvM    I   ......  I  I     r*  M  '1 

•  *  *  ^    ~i  —  h  r*  r*  i   h  *  *  *  <-j 

'  «i    *  *  *  *    i  ' 


Stay-at-home  Doh  saw  Soh  walking  out,  Dress'd  like  a  soldier,  and  shouting  about ; 
Marcato. 


mf 


I     I       I 


:±     -f-  3:  V        Fed.      * 

-r^Ped.     * 


A          rit.  e  cret. 


5 


Who  could  be  fin  -er     or    brav  -  er  than  I  ?        Doh  thought  he  could  but  did  not    try. 


£ 


m     £" 


— i — 

|>    »  |*  k    )P 


^=IF= 


^T 


LJ 


rit.  e  cres. 


r       r 


Fed.     * 


104 


AURAL    CULTQEE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  II  (b).  The  King  of  France. 

„    Moderate.  -    -.»  -^ 

Introduction 

of 
Upper  Doh. 


E.  B. 


doh' 
soh 
doh 


fgg 

i      i 

i          i 

—  j 

!=?H 

= 

^=ft 

-P  P- 

The  King    of    France  went        u] 
Moderato. 

>    the          hill      Witl 

J-    J-       1[  f= 
i  twen-  ty        thou-sand 

<•  —      ^—  . 

^ 

0    e\ 

—  ^  —  ^*<- 

— 

1  Tj 

i  j  

V" 

• 

i            > 

i^  'gj.  J?1^  JJ 

•-^               >         i               .          . 

fo):  Q  ^ 

i 

1       f. 

ff  

-f 

E3 

J          1 

^4- 

•  .  -  —^  — 

J  r 

,_ 

-1- 

—  h  

^^^ 

»       » 

^1^  Jir  F-if 


men; The    King    of       France  came  down    the          hill    And    ne'er  went 


1  2      »          6 


£ 


3 


6  4 


Fed. 


*     Fed. 


Fed.  * 


poco  rit. 


up         a  gain and    ne'er    went        up         a      -     gain. 


Fed. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


105 


STEP  III  (b).  Oranges  and  Lemons. 


E.  R 


Introduction 
of  Me. 


doh' 
soh 

• 

me 
doh 


mf  Andante. 


^^ 


£ 


O  -ran-ges  and  lem-ons,  Say  the  bells  of    St.  Cleinent's.You  owe  me  five 
Andante. 


1        1 


m/ 


1 


Ped.v 


?P 


J^P  J    J     w  J 

H*  —  J  —  « 

- 

-4-^  

-^  —  J  — 

^j        |        szns 

(err  P  «— 
tj 

far  -  things,  Say  the 

4  —  —  — 

bells    of      St 

r*      J     J 

Mar  -  tin's, 

1  
f*        m       f* 

• 

When  will    yo 

^ 

a 

1           *      J  ad 

pay     me,    Say  the 

r"  $ 

r~,* 

p 
p 

f    W 

E 

BP 

p~6I  1  1 

rTJ  

1  — 

S_:£fc3        *  

-^  

i  — 

—  i  0 

0 

—  i  j  — 

Fed.1- 


una  cor  da. 


ra«. 


fift   J    J      i 

3^2  — 

i 

|       J 

1 

^-J1 

i  !  —  J- 

£i  •  

bells    of   Old 

Bai  -  ley,        When  I    grow 

3  —  "  "  J  ^  •  -1  

rich,       Say  the  bells  of  Shore-ditch, 
ratf.                                        _ 

(^t>  r  —  J^j 

••  P         [<-*•.  \ 

—  i 
i 

1- 

— 

1  1  1 

kP  !      U 

^y       —  J-1-^-1  —    fe  »*  '  s 
^              -^w-      -szg:        :jf 

c 

si 

* 
» 

i 

m_   jg 

Z.         -si       .11 
*"         ^ 

—    1       —        ^  ^ 

^r^~  ^  j~ 

-j-H 

-j*5 

1  0^ 

—  -j  —  i 

~1  —  i  — 

v\)                     0 

-{            ^ 

1.J 

0\         J 

— 

—  !  1 

. 

tre  corde. 


- 


106 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  IV  (b).       Twinkle,  twinkle,  little  Star. 


E.  K. 


In 

production 

'         Allegro  moderato. 

—            » 

'  0  .  b-u  j 

• 

• 

_^        • 

of  Te. 

\ 

/L  b  t>  L  i 

^ 

9 

—  F  

-f  —  (•— 

—  f— 

—  at 

-rd  1  

icp   7  ft  * 

=  

1  — 

—  F  — 

H  1— 

-\  — 

— 

i  

doh> 
te 

soh 
me 
doh 

Twin  -  kle,        twin  -  kle, 
Allegro  moderato.                     t 

rt         U.  i                                             S                 W~                      "™                 "« 

lit  - 
h       1 

tie 

r 

V 
star,              How        ] 

v  B3  ^ 

XW  p  hi 

•  n— 

—  ^  n— 

i  1*  i    *  *i  £  i 

—  «  — 

—  LB  — 

|Q)  *  v  P  *.  -.  
tJ 

n 

r1 

f 

d 

TT7 

—  !•  — 

\f  ^ 

^             ; 

^ 

—  U 

—  i  1 

|  1  

1  

* 

^      m 

fcp'V    ->y 

• 

'.         .       '. 

• 

1? 

Al  J    J 


poco  rit.  a  tempo. 


r  r  r  J 


won  -  dcr     what    you  are ;  Up         s      -      bove     the    world     so 


rrr^te 


j  j  j 


jooco  rit. 


Fed.  »       I 


^ 


high, 


Like  a  dia    -   mond       in          the  sky. 


tt 


7 


i 


J 


Fed.  »     Fed. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


107 


STEP  V  (b).  Goosey,  Goosey  Gander. 


E.  R. 


Introduction 
of  Ray. 


Allegro  moderato. 


doh1 
te 

• 

soh 

me 
ray 
doh 


-*—? 


J  •       J    " 


Goo-sey,  goo-sey       gan    -    der, 
Allegro  moderato. 


Whi-ther  shall  I        wan   -     dcr, 


mf_ 


r  r 


Up  stairs  and  down     -    stairs,  and          In     my     la  -  dy's       cham      -       her. 


Fed. 


Fed. 


Fed., 


108 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  VI  (b).  Mary,  Mary. 

Tempo  di  Valse. 


E.  B. 


utrouuction  -U-'H*  ftmt                 —    —  i  1            ; 
of  Fah.       flT  *Y      1  1  rl  J  ^  J  —  j  

—  1  1  1— 

•             i        tl               <zJ             ^ 
Ma     -     ry,       Ma    -    ry,     quite         con  -  tra     -     ry, 

IQ               n  w       Tempo  di  Valse. 

—  I         l        I  — 
How  does  your 

^/    «^  O                                                                                                                                                1                                                    1 

, 

•                            .^H           -.*)"*                                                 f                                             r*                                                 £* 

• 

son        ^v              j     J          3—3           2     *           Z—  —  4 

fBIi 

^            ii        :J:  -~5        ^5  ^        ^S"  7^- 

* 

1  tt^                   ^^"jt  y?  —  (^  —  ~                                                          '^  H  *^  * 

—  PJ  1 

^-^    •             .  \ 

con      v                                    _  ,                                      — 
»                         Ped.              *    Ped' 

^^ 

P|             i                                           ~             f^               ^ 

(^                       0 

^                   ^           ^     "                                J                  —I           h                    1 

—I  1  

gar       -       den        grow,  With     sil    -     -    ver 

bells            and 

J-     0  H                             i 

i/  **j*                           j                                 i                                                     II 

—  e,              1              1 

/W    ft  —  P  _•  _d  P  >«""v   1  —  1  —  «  1  T          1  1  — 
Ifft  ~  ^  €  *  m  •  ^        •  — 

^  J         JJ 

—  ^  J—  '  S  *  — 

tJ                                                                    ~TJ-                                   »*•       ^ 

^                        ^                                                  ^   —  **  ^                                             ^  ^                     <P 

^           .H 

1  q 

™j                            !                             !              r          ^    • 

^^  1 

ft—  ^                        ^ 

'^^                                 >^__                 _^f* 

P_i  1__  —  -  —  '  .  .  —  ^  — 

^       —  = 

T 

C^  —                              —  ^  ^  ^  -j  ^  ^  -j  — 

-          1  1 

coc      -      kle       shells         And     pret  •  ty     maids     all       in         a 

row   

&-$—?  —                    —  *  —          —  '  f*  —  —  1  1  f*  1  f- 

f          1 

5^1           i_4             ^     ^     ^    *     rSi 

23 

^'  ^  —  1  1  !  ZJ  1~ 

r~| 

^  l^jrJ    •           —  1    cJ^  $*     \_^*    '                                         —  ^- 

1—  j  «-J 

=_ 

—  ^ 

1 

^^                                *^—  *    *                 ^  ^ 



P^-  ^Z      "^  -^  

-. 

—  F=^^s  —  1  1  ^~J  i1"8  —  •  ^ 

•^  —  *  —  Ml 

.  J.  .  ^T  J.      W.  .   '                                p 

•    -1  n 

~~3  —  r  —  r~" 

^   Jt—              —  J  —    —  |  —      —  f  —                       —  <r  1  *  — 

Ped. 


Ped. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


109 


STEP  VII  (b).       There  was  an  Old  Woman. 


E.  R. 


Introduction 
of  Lah. 


Modfrato. 
mf 


doh1 
te 

lah 
soh 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 


There  was    an  old     wo-man  who  lived  in      a     shoe,      She    had     BO   ma-ny 
Moderate. 


mf 


fe):  n  M— 

£•_>  v  ~  

^4  

—  l  

-£3-    • 

g^ 

^=^ 

^T^ 

-=t  ' 

cres. 


chil-dren  she  didn't  know  what  to     do ;     She  gave  them  some  broth       with  -  out 


a  -  ny 


Fed. 


bread,  and    whipped  them  all    sound-ly     and  sent  them    to      bed. 


Fed. 


AURAL    CULTURE    BASED    UPON 


STEP  VIII  (b).  Little  Miss  Muffet. 

(With  simplified  Accompaniment.) 


Introduction  Moderate,  with  well  marked  time. 

complete 


Scale. 


doh' 

te 

lah 

son 

fah 
me 

ray 
doh 


-I 4- 


-I 1 1— i 4- 


0*0 

Lit -tie  Miss  Muf-fet          Sat  on     a      tuf-fct,        Eat-ing  some  curds  and 

^=1 


:a: 


+=+- 


Fed.         *     Fed.         *    timile. 


whey, . 


Eat-ing  some  curds   and  whey; There 


Am. 


a 


5 


-j — i — \- 


-+—r 


+ 

came    a    big     spi  -  der,  And    sat  down  be  -  side  her,  And  frightened  Miss  Muf-fet     a  - 


ig. 


. 

r 


*    m)    *\^ 


-§ 


way, 

*~ 


frightened  Miss  Muf-fet     a  -  way. 


^~; 


r    i   i 


3t 


*-* *-* 


. 

dim.  e  nt. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION. 


Ill 


STEP  IX  (b).         As   Tommy   was   walking. 

(With  simplified  Accompaniment). 
Introduction  Moderate. 

of  the  three 

Primary 

Triads. 


As    Tom  -  my       was    walk  -  ing        one     fine   sum  -  mer    day,         Some 
Moderate. 


cher  -  ry    .    cheeked    ap  -  pies  he 


on  his          way, 


<S(- 


P3=g 


mf 


^r^s 


Fed. 


#     Fed. 


*     Fed. 


»     Fed. 


saw       on  his       way; 


112        AUEAL   CULTURE  BASED   UPON  MUSICAL  APPRECIATION. 


KECREATIYE    MUSIC 

Suitable   for   the  teacher   to  play   to  the  pupil   without   technical   comment. 

(See  Introductory  Chapter.) 


BOCCHEBINI 

BRAHMS 
DAQUIN 
DEBUSSY 

ELQAR  

EDWARD  GERMAN 

GOUNOD 
GRIEO 


FERDINAND  HILLER 
MENDELSSOHN  .. 


MOSZKOWSKI 


RAFF 


SCHUBERT 


SCHUMANN 


WAGNER 


WEBER  .. 


(a)  Minuet  in  A. 

(b)  Minuet  in  Efe. 

Hungarian  Dances  (Nos.  6  and  7). 
"  Le  Coucou." 

"Golliwog's    Cake-walk"    from    "Children's    Corner" 
Suite. 

Bavarian  Dances. 

(a)  Dances  from  Henry  VIII  Music. 

(b)  Masque  from  "  As  you  like  it." 

(c)  "  The  Revel "  (Tarantella  from  "  Gipsy  Suite  "). 

(a)  "  Funeral  March  of  a  Marionette." 

(b)  Soldier's  Chorus  from  "  Faust." 

(a)  "  Elfentanz  "  and  "  Albumblatt "  (Op.  12). 

(b)  "  Voglein  "  (Op.  43). 

(c)  "  Norwegian  Bridal-procession  "  (Op.  19,  No.  2). 

(d)  "Wedding-Day"  (Op.  65,  No.  6). 

"  Zur  Guitarre  "  (Impromptu). 

(a)  War  March  of  the  Priests  ("  Athalie  "). 

(b)  Wedding  March  ("  Midsummer  Night's  Dream  "). 

(c)  "  Lieder  ohne  Worte  "  (Nos.  30  and  34). 

(d)  Overture  ("  Midsummer  Night's  Dream  "). 

...     (a)  "  Serenata." 

(b)  Spanish  Dances. 

(a)  "La  Fileuse." 

(b)  Rigaudon. 

(a)  Entr'acte  II  and  Ballet  Music  from  "  Rosamunde." 

(b)  "  Moment  Musical  "  (Op.  94). 

(a)  Album  for  the  Young  (Op.  68),  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  5,  7,  8.  10- 

11,  12,  16,  17,  18,  20,  23,  24  and  28. 

(b)  "  Jagdlied  "  (Op.  82). 

(c)  "  Schlummerlied  "  (Op.  124,  No.  2). 

(a)  Bridal  March  from  "  Lohengrin." 

(b)  Spinning  Chorus  from  "  The  Flying  Dutchman." 

March  from  "  Concertstiick." 
'.'  Other  suitable  pieces  will  be  found  in  the  succeeding  Appendix. 


APPEJNTDIX. 


MUSIC  AND  THE  YOUNG  CHILD, 


THE  REALIZATION  AND  EXPRESSION  OF  MUSIC 
THROUGH   MOVEMENT, 


BY 


MARIE  SALT. 

ALL  teachers  of  young  children  should  be  interested  in  the  place  and 
function  of  music  in  the  early  stages  of  life.  The  little  child  is  too 
immature  to  study  music  formally,  and  to  follow  the  lines  of  training 
arranged  for  those  who  have  gained  power  of  concentration,  and  are 
capable  of  the  intellectual  process  of  analysis. 

How  are  we  to  utilize  these  early  years  of  life  so  as  to  reap  a 
rich  harvest  later  on  ?  Before  we  go  further,  let  us  consider  what 
is  our  aim.  Shall  we  work  for  visible  results  ?  Will  our  end  be 
accomplished  when  the  individual  can  perform,  can  sing,  play  or 
dance  ? 

If  this  is  the  only  aim  of  the  teacher,  the  best  in  art  cannot  develop. 
It  is  impossible  to  measure  artistic  feeling  fully  and  truly  by  any 
form  of  outward  result.  And,  moreover,  the  teacher  who  works  solely 
for  such  results  will  surely  have  a  limiting  and  narrowing  effect  upon 
his  pupils — only  a  few  of  whom  can  achieve  success  in  this  direction, 
and  even  these  will  be  likely  to  lose  much  of  the  best  in  music, 
while  the  average  child  must  remain  largely  unchanged  by  the 
training.  Unable  to  achieve  great  things  in  art,  he  is  too  often 
debarred  from  that  other  form  of  artistic  education,  namely, 
appreciation.  Should  not  the  aim  of  musical  training  be  primarily 


ii  APPENDIX. 

to  develop  the  power  to  understand  and  appreciate  music  ?  Every 
child  requires  this  for  his  complete  development.  The  power  to 
perform  successfully  is  secondary  to  this. 

When  and  how  shall  we  introduce  music  into  the  environment  of 
the  child  in  order  to  influence  his  development  ? 

The  answer  to  these  questions  will  be  found  (a)  in  the  Study  of 
the  Child,  and  (b)  in  the  History  of  Music. 

There  are  two  principles  of  child  development  which  modern 

educational   thought  has  proved   to   be   fundamental, 
Child  Study.  *  ... 

and    necessary    to    the    intelligent    understanding    of 

child  growth  : — 

(1)  MENTAL  ASSIMILATION  is  INCOMPLETE  WITHOUT  EXPRESSION. 

Development  takes  place  as  a  result  of  the  interaction  of  the 
environment  upon  the  individual,  and  of  the  individual  upon  the 
environment.  This  is  to  say,  there  are  two  aspects  in  the  process 
of  learning — (a)  Impression,  and  (b)  Expression. 

All  stimulations  from  the  outside  world  finding  their  way  from 
the  senses  to  the  brain  and  thence  to  the  mind,  must  make  for 
themselves  a  way  of  discharge ;  and  the  normal  paths,  in  early  life, 
are  to  the  muscles,  i.e.,  the  completion  of  the  cycle  of  mental  activity 
is  found  in  movement.  Therefore,  if  we  are  going  to  follow  Nature's 
laws  in  the  training  of  the  child,  we  must  recognize  expression, 
movement,  as  a  necessary  part  of  learning  and  of  intelligent 
assimilating. 

We  are  working  against  Nature  when  we  stimulate  thought, 
perception  and  feeling,  and  do  not  provide  for  adequate  expression 
through  action. 

(2)  CHILD  DEVELOPMENT  is  ANALOGOUS  TO  RACE  DEVELOPMENT. 

The  child  passes  through  well-marked  stages  of  growth,  and 
each  period  has  its  own  peculiar  requirements.  He  recapitulates  in 
general  broad  outline  the  history  of  the  race,  i.e.,  he  has  inherited 
an  organism  which  is  the  product  of  past  racial  activity,  and  which 
must  develop  along  the  same  lines,  and  according  to  the  same  general 
plan,  that  effected  the  progress  of  his  ancestors.  His  organism  is  so 
ordered  in  its  growth  that  his  development  will  be  dependent  upon, 
and  responsive  to,  the  same  types  of  stimuli  and  activity  as  those  to 
which  the  race  was  subject  during  its  parallel  period. 


APPENDIX.  iii 

The  application  of  these  two  principles  requires  that  music  for 
children  be  (1)  associated  with  movement,  and  (2)  primitive  in 
character  in  the  early  stages. 

The  History  of  Music  reveals  the  truth  that  it  has  had  a  vital 

place  among  the  influences  that  have  been  at  work  moulding  and 

developing  mankind  from   earliest  times.      Humanity 

Musicf^  °  ^as  a^ways  fe^  ^e  need  f°r  wider  and  more  subtle 
means  of  expression  than  speech  alone  affords.  Music 
is  pre-eminently  the  language  of  the  emotions,  and  we  find  primitive 
peoples  in  all  times  expressing  their  deeper  feelings  in  rhythmic 
movement  and  sound. 

We  are  sometimes  inclined  to  think  of  Rhythm  as  foreign  to  the 
child,  but  if  we  are  to  work  effectively  with  this  aspect  of  education, 

we  must  recognize  it  as  an  integral  part  of  his  being. 
Rhythm.  ...  u  fe     .    .  .  .  g        *T. 

allied  to  gesture,  imitative  activity,  and  language. 

The  child's  nervous  system  is  responsive  to  sound  and  rhythm  at 
a  very  early  age,  and  his  normal  and  healthy  development  requires  it, 
as  it  does  exercise,  language,  and  toy-play.  Musical  education  begins 
in  the  cradle  with  the  lullaby  and  nursery  song  of  the  mother.  This 
indirect  training  must  be  continued  in  the  school — still  indirect  in 
character  in  the  kindergarten  and  infant  school,  though  gradually 
preparing  for  the  more  intellectual,  as  well  as  the  more  purely 
emotional,  enjoyment  of  a  later  stage. 

The  music  that  appeals  to  the  young  child  is  simple  in  character, 
with  a  strongly  marked  rhythm,  and  during  the  early  stages  of  life  he 
will  take  pleasure  in  it  as  a  whole ;  minuter  musical  perception  will 
come  later,  after  a  long  period  of  enjoying  music  through  its  power 
to  inspire  and  vitalize. 

An  experiment  based  on  these  ideas  has  been  carried  on  since 
1909,  at  the  Streatham  Hill  High  School,  of  the  Girls'  Public  Day 
School  Trust.  The  musical  education  of  children  between  four  and 
eight  years  has  consisted  of— 

(1)  FREE  RHYTHMIC  MOVEMENTS. 

(a)  Playing  of  instruments  of  percussion,  such  as  drums, 

tambourines,  cymbals  and  triangles. 

(b)  Dancing. 

(2)  THE  SINGING  OF  SONGS. 

In  the  Band  of  instruments  of  percussion  the  children  at  first 
play  these  instruments  quite  freely,  accompanying  simple  and  lively 


iv  APPENDIX. 

tunes  which  are  played  on  the  piano.     If  loud  and  soft,  quick  and 

slow  tunes  are   taken  successively,  the  children  become  conscious 

of  these  qualities,  and  in  time  respond  to  them.     When 

they  can  recognize  some  tunes  as  loud,  and  others  as 

soft,  they  are  ready  for  the  more  detailed  work  of  discovering  the 

strong  (*'  loud")  and  weak  ("  soft")  pulses  in  well-marked  tunes. 

At  first,  the  children  do  not  in  any  way  formulate  their 
knowledge,  but  play  loudly  when  they  hear  loud  sounds,  and  softly 
when  they  hear  soft  ones  ;  later  they  can  count  how  many  soft  pulses 
come  between  the  loud  pulses. 

The  band  can  also  be  used  to  help  the  children  to  gain 
elementary  ideas  of  form.  (See  page  ix.) 

The  simple  musical  examples  given  below  for  dancing  are  suitable 
here,  and  the  treatment  is  the  same ;  but  dancing  is  more  satisfying, 
since  it  is  the  response  of  the  whole  body,  whereas  the  band-playing 
is  more  limited,  being  the  response  of  only  a  part  of  the  organism. 
Again,  the  band  is  only  helpful  with  quite  young  children,  because, 
as  soon  as  a  child's  ear  begins  to  be  educated,  he  passes  the  stage 
when  such  a  crude  form  of  musical  expression  is  of  value. 

We  are  apt  to  look  upon  dancing  as  a  finished  and  conventional 
art,  as  for  example  is  writing.  But  it  is,  like  drawing,  music  and 
sculpture,  a  creative  art,  and  therefore  always  in 
process  of  development.  We  think  children  must 
learn  to  dance,  and  teachers  are  engaged  to  instruct  the  young  in 
certain  prescribed  movements  of  body  and  limbs,  as  in  writing  they 
direct  the  movements  of  the  fingers.  But  surely  this  is  a  mis- 
conception of  the  truth.  Every  child  must  learn  to  form  letters 
according  to  fixed  rules,  because  these  are  merely  symbols  and  allow 
of  no  variation.  Dancing,  on  the  other  hand,  requires  different 
handling.  A  comparison  with  the  teaching  of  drawing  will  make 
this  clear.  The  art  of  drawing  is  just  emerging  from  the  period 
when  it  also  was  taught  conventionally.  In  the  drawing  lesson  of  a 
generation  or  so  ago  the  child  copied  either  from  drawing  cards  or 
from  the  teacher's  work ;  he  learned  to  copy.  Certain  forms  became 
fixed  in  his  mind,  and  could  be  reproduced  at  any  time ;  he  knew 
his  daffodil,  rabbit,  house,  view,  design,  etc.,  as  they  appeared  in  his 
copy ;  repetition  had  stamped  in  these  images.  In  time  he  became 
copy-minded;  he  could  reproduce  more  or  less  faithfully,  but  could 
not  originate. 


APPENDIX.  v 

Is  not  a  similar  process  at  work  with  regard  to  the  usual 
teaching  of  dancing?  The  child  must  learn  a  series  of  dictated 
movements.  These  are  sometimes  graceful,  and  may  give  a  very 
pleasing  effect,  but  it  is  often  found  that  a  child  who  has  been 
subjected  to  this  treatment  is  capable  of  nothing  better ;  he  is  a 
reproducer,  not  an  artist;  his  development  has  been  arrested  on 
a  low  plane. 

In  teaching  a  creative  art  we  must  realize  that  we  are  dealing 
with  an  inborn  potentiality.  Every  child  will  dance,  just  as  every  child 
will  draw  or  sing,  if  opportunities  are  not  denied  to  him.  All  primitive 
peoples  danced  and  drew,  they  did  it  for  the  pleasure  of  the  activity, 
for  the  satisfaction  gained  by  the  spontaneous  expression  of  their 
thoughts,  emotions  or  sentiments.  It  is  only  in  recent  times  that  we 
have  lowered  dancing  to  the  level  of  a  conventional  performance. 
The  dances  of  the  musical  play  and  of  the  ball-room  limit  our  vision  ; 
they  are  but  stereotyped  and  decadent  forms  of  the  art. 

A  brief  experience  with  young  children  will  shew  that  the 
beautiful  art  of  natural  dancing  will  live  again  if  only  we  give 
them  ample  opportunities  to  respond  to  music  in  ways  which  are 
perfectly  free  and  unconventional. 

As  with  primitive  peoples,  so  with  the  child,  the  earliest  stages 
of  dancing  are  almost  barbaric  in  their  vigour ;  jumping,  hopping, 
springing,  twisting,  etc.,  are  freely  indulged  in,  and  these  movements 
are  often  accompanied  by  sounds.  Gradually,  as  a  result  of  (1)  the 
effect  of  the  music  upon  the  child,  and  (2)  his  increased  muscular 
control,  these  more  barbaric  activities  give  place  to  rhythmic  and 
graceful  movements.  It  is  to  describe  both  these  types  of  activity 
that  the  word  "  dancing  "  is  here  used. 

What  has  been  said  regarding  the  formal  dances  of  the  stage 

and   ball-room    must  in  no  way  be   understood   to   refer  to   such 

national  dances  as   the  beautiful  Morris  and  Country 

Dances*1  Dances  re-discovered  and  taught  by  Mr.  Cecil  Sharp 

and  his  band  of  dancers.     These  have  rightly  a  very 

important   place  in  the  dancing   of  older  children  and  adults,  but 

for  three  reasons  they  are  not  suitable  for  young  children  : — 

(1)  The  interest  and  chief  value  of  such  dances  is  historical 

and  impersonal ;   little  children  are  too  unlearned  to 
appreciate  this. 

(2)  The  emotions  expressed  by  them  are  adult  emotions. 


vi  APPENDIX. 

(3)  The  physical  activity  involved  requires  too  much  precision 
and  accuracy  for  young  children  to  attempt  without 
overstrain. 

In  the  work  originated  and  carried  out  at  the  Streatham  Hill 
High  School  the  five- minute  intervals  between  lessons  and  two 

twenty-minute  periods  a  week  have  been  utilized  for 
Method.  ,     .     .  mi_        •       i 

rhythmic  movements.       Ihe  aim   has  been  to   bring 

the  children  daily  under  the  influence  of  music,  to  give  them 
opportunities  of  listening,  enjoying,  and  of  responding  to  it  in  the 
manner  most  natural  to  them  at  their  particular  stage  of  growth. 

There  has  been  no  drill — no  practice  to  make  perfect — no  attempt 
to  produce  a  pleasing  spectacle.  No  criticism  has  been  made  regarding 
the  movements  of  the  children ;  these  have  been  neither  praised 
nor  blamed.  The  dancing  has  been  perfectly  free — entirely  the  result 
of  the  spontaneous  activity  of  the  children  without  any  directions 
given,  or  pattern  shewn  by  the  teacher.  Instead  of  stress  being 
laid  on  performance,  every  effort  has  been  made  to  keep  the  children 
unself-conscious,  and  forgetful  of  all  else  but  the  music. 

Improvement  has  been  brought  about  through  development  of 
the  children's  power  to  listen  to  and  enjoy  music,  together  with  their 
increased  motor  control ;  while  their  experiences  have  been  widened 
by  the  unconscious,  spontaneous  imitation  of  each  other,  and  even 
more,  by  original  activity. 

Music  has  often  been  connected  with  story,  song  and  poem,  and 
the  children  have  been  encouraged  to  imagine  stories  about  the  music. 
Dramatization,  too,  has  sometimes  been  a  part  of  the  activity. 

Roughly  speaking,  four  stages  of  musical  development  are  usually 
observable,  characteristic  of  children  from  about  4  to  8  years  of  age. 

STAGE  I. — Children  about  4  to  5  years. 

This  period  is  given  up  to  the  unrestrained  enjoyment  of  music. 
The  children  have  merry  nursery  tunes  played  to  them,  and  are 
allowed  to  move  quite  freely  in  response.  They  have  little  power  to 
attend  to  the  music,  but  it  exhilarates  them,  and  affords  an  outlet  for 
their  pent-up  energy,  which  is  vented  in  running,  hopping,  jumping, 
skipping,  stamping,  etc.  Although  nothing  is  forced,  the  children  are 
encouraged  to  listen  to  the  music,  and  gradually  they  are  influenced 
by  the  rhythm,  and  gain  muscular  control.  Any  nursery-rhyme  tunes 
are  suitable  for  use  at  this  stage. 


APPENDIX. 


vu 


STAGE  II. — Children  about  5  to  6  years. 

The  children  are  now  ready  to  appreciate  to  some  extent  such 
matters  as  character,  pulse,  and  simple  structure.  There  is  no  attempt 
to  formulate  knowledge  of  this  kind,  but  the  music  presented  to  the 
children  is  such  that  through  their  responsive  movements  they  become 
conscious  of  these  fundamental  characteristics.  If  it  were  possible  to 
introduce  really  primitive  music  to  the  children  at  this  and  the  earlier 
stage,  it  would  be  interesting  to  study  its  effect  on  them,  and  note 
their  response  to  it. 

The  idea  of  character  is  introduced  by  a  talk ;  can  the  children 
hear  the  dog,  cat,  bird,  wind,  sea,  thunder,  etc.,  speak  ?  Music  too, 
speaks.  They  listen  to  a  tune,  such  for  example  as 
"  Three  Blind  Mice,"  noticing  when  the  music  is  slow 
and  when  quick  : — 


Character. 


THKEE   BLIND   MICE. 


Largo. 


/Ts 


F 


!^-     J-    Ij-J 


Si    1 


:fc 


Pretto. 


i 


M 


Laryo. 


fJJ    / 


^ 


i 


^=g 


y 


The  children  dance  freely,  listening  for  the  music  to  tell  them 
when  to  move  quickly  and  when  slowly.  Many  other  tunes  are 
played  (see  list)  and  contrasting  types,  such  as  "Sleep,  little  Child," 
and  "Jack  and  Jill,"  if  introduced  in  succession,  are  found  most 
helpful  in  getting  the  children  to  feel  differences  of  character.  The 
movements  made  by  them  are  unrestrained  and  varied,  and  any 
which  give  them  special  pleasure  are  encouraged.  Jumping,  dancing, 
clapping,  running,  marching,  tapping,  stamping,  and  free  movements 
of  body  and  arms  are  all  included.  The  aim  here,  as  throughout, 
is  to  afford  the  children  opportunities  (1)  to  listen,  and  (2)  to  give 
expression  through  movement. 


viii  APPENDIX. 

The  following  pieces  are  useful  for  work  at  this  stage  :— 

'  Ding  Dong  Bell  "     (Dulce  Domum)  JOHN  FARMER. 

•Looby  Light"  „  „ 

'  Hot  Cross  Buns "  „  ...         ...         ...  „ 

'Where  are  you  going  to?      (British  Nursery  Khymes)  ...  MOFFAT&  KIDSON. 

'  The  Wild  Eider  "    (Album  for  the  Young)  SCHUMANN. 

'  Hurry  Skurry  "     (Op.  140) GURLITT. 


"  Irish  Washerwoman  "  } 

"  Reel  of  Tulloch  "  >  March  and  Dance  Album          ...     SOMERVELL. 

"  Stumpie  "  J 


"  Old  Scotch  air  "  } 

"  Off  she  goes  "  j-  March  and  Dance  Album          ...     SOMERVELL 

"  Come,  lasses  and  lads  "J 


"  Men  of  Harlech  "         "j 

"Hearts  of  Oak  "  V  March  and  Dance  Album  ...     SOMERVELL. 

"Vicar  of  Bray  " 

Tunes  which  taken  successively  afford  the  elements  of  contrast 
are  valuable,  such  as  :— 

"  Hush-a-bye,  Baby."     (Dulce  Domum)       JOHN  FARMER. 

"  Girls  and  boys,  come  out  to  play."     (Dulce  Domum)      ...  „ 

"  Jenny  Jones  (Cadair  IdrisV"   (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)     HADOW. 

"  Oranges  and  Lemons."     (Dulce  Domum) ...         ...         ...     JOHN  FARMER. 


It  is  noticed  that  many  children  at  this  stage  shew  little  feeling 
for  pulse,  others  lack  the  muscular  control  which  would  enable  them 

to  express  it,  but  as  no  progress  can  be  made  till  they 
Pulse.  .  ., 

are  conscious  of  pulse,  emphasis  is  now  laid  upon  it. 

The  children  are  led  to  notice  loud  and  soft  sounds  apart  from 
music,  such  as  thunder,  hail,  church  and  school  bell,  motor  horns, 
summer  rain,  the  cat's  purr,  patter  of  the  dog's  feet,  hum  of  insects  • 
they  themselves  make  loud  and  soft  sounds  with  feet,  hands  and 
voices,  play  such  sounds  on  the  piano,  and  listen  for  the  accented 
and  non-accented  sounds  in  music  played  to  them.  They  then 
illustrate  the  same  thing  with  their  band  instruments,  as  well  as 
by  free  movements.  Later,  the  word  "pulse"  is  introduced — the 
children  find  their  own  pulses  and  feel  the  throb,  listen  again  to 
the  throb  in  music.  Here  it  may  be  necessary  for  the  teacher  at 
first  to  mark  th«  pulses  very  strongly  in  his  playing,  even  to  the  point 


APPENDIX.  ix 

of  exaggeration  ;  but  before  long  the  children  will  be  able  to  play  in 
the  band  or  dance  to  J,  |,  J,  or  f  time  with  comparative  ease.  In 
this  way,  they  come  into  dynamic  relations  with  pulse.  Where  there 
is  any  difficulty,  it  is  helpful  for  them  to  form  a  circle,  raising 
hands  and  lowering  them  on  a  strong  beat,  or  to  tap,  clap,  or  jump 
together.  The  teacher  and  more  advanced  children  can  thus  help 
those  who  are  less  developed. 

Any    of    the     following    National     or     Nursery    tunes     lend 
themselves  to  this  part  of  the  work  : — 

|  time.     "  Keel  Eow  "  (March  and  Dance  Album)  ...         ...     SOMERVELL. 

"Baa,  baa,  Black  Sheep  "  (Dulce  Domum)        ...         ...     JOHN  FARMER. 

"  Soldier's  March  "  (Album  for  the  Young)        ...         ...     SCHUMANN. 

|  time.     "  Cadair  Idris  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands) HADOW. 

"  Lavender's  Blue  "  (Dulce  Domum)       FARMER. 

"  Oranges  and  Lemons  "  (British  Nursery  Ehymes)     . . .     MOFFAT  &  KIDSON. 

£  time.     "  Upon  Paul's  Steeple  "  (Dulce  Domum)  FARMER. 

"  Song  for  England  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)     ...     HADOW. 
And  any  strongly-marked  Marches. 


The  children's  attention  is  drawn  to  the  repetition  of  tune ; 
for  example,  "  Hush-a-by,  Baby "  is  dramatized,  one  child  lying 
asleep,  the  others  dancing  round  in  a  ring.  The  children 
naturally  ask  for  it  again  and  again,  and  on  each 
occasion  some  change  is  made — they  dance  the  opposite  way — join 
hands  with  a  partner — dance  separately — form  little  rings  of  two  or 
three  children,  etc.  Then  the  teacher  suggests  that  the  tune  will  be 
played  three  or  four  times  in  succession,  without  a  pause  between, 
and  the  children  decide  beforehand  how  they  will  shew  the  repetitions. 
This  requires  careful  listening  on  their  part,  in  order  to  note  the 
moment  at  which  to  change  their  movement. 

In  connexion  with  the  band  lessons,  it  has  been  found  that  the 
children,  in  listening  to  such  pieces  as  "  St.  Patrick's  Day,"  Handel's 
"  March  in  Scipio,"  etc.,  note  with  comparative  ease  changes  in  the 
character  of  the  music.  Moreover,  if  there  is  more  than  one  "tune" 
(i.e.,  part)  in  the  course  of  a  piece,  they  readily  respond  to  the  idea 
of  different  instruments  playing  the  different  "  tunes  "  ;  for  example, 
in  a  piece  in  simple  Ternary  Form,  they  will  perhaps  suggest  that 
drums  and  cymbals  shall  play  the  first  part,  triangles  and 
tambourines  the  second  part,  and  that  drums  and  cymbals  shall  play 
again  when  the  first  part  is  repeated 


x  APPENDIX. 

STAGE  III. — Children  about  6  to  7  years. 

The  children's  experiences  here  are  similar  to  those  at  Stage  II, 

but  more  varied  and  complex.    Simple  compositions  of  a  well-marked 

character  are  chosen,  and  the  children   dance   quite 

freely,  the  teacher's   work    being  to  encourage   ever 

greater  attention  to  the  music,  and  to  stimulate  imagination  by  means 

of  story  and  suggestion. 

The  following — amongst  others — have  been  found  suitable  for 
this  purpose  :— 

"The  Hornpipe  "  (March  and  Dance  Album)    SOMERVELL. 

"  De'il  among  the  Tailors "         „  ...         ...  „ 

"  Knight  Rupert  "  (Album  for  the  Young)          ...         ...  SCHUMANN. 

"March  of  Dwarfs"  (Op.  54,  No.  3)        GBIEO. 

"Humoresque"      DVORAK. 

"  Sicilianisch  "  (Album  for  the  Young) SCHUMANN. 

"  Norse  Song "  „  ...         ...         ...  „ 

"  Italian  Mariner "         ,,  ...         ...         ...  ,, 

"  First  Loss "  „  ...         ...         ...  „ 

"  Mirlitons  "  (Casse  Noisette  Suite)         TSCHAIKOWSKI. 

"  Lieder  ohne  Worte  "  (No.  30) MENDELSSOHN. 

(No.  34)    ... 

"Berceuse"  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  GBIEG. 

"  Schlummerlied "  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  SCHUMANN. 

"Narcissus"  ...          ..         ...         ...         ...         ...  NEVIN. 

"  Henry  VIII  Dances  "      GERMAN. 

"  Nell  Gwyn  Dances "        ...         ...         ...         ...         ...          ,, 


The  children  are  now  led  to  discover  and  express  the  pulse  in 
more  difficult  examples.  In  the  lower  stage  they  shewed  the  pulse  and 
measure  by  alternating  steps  and  by  arm  movements — 
now  they  are  ready  to  express  this  knowledge  in  words. 
They  understand  the  word  "  measure  "  in  relation  to  length,  and  in 
reference  to  weight  and  liquid  measures,  because  they  use  these  in 
their  practical  arithmetic;  it  is  then  suggested  that  we  measure 
music  too.  They  listen  to  one  measure,  or  bar,  of  music  and  are  soon 
able,  by  recognition  of  the  strong  pulses,  to  find  the  number  of 
measures  in  short  phrases,  and  can  dance,  or  play  their  band- 
instruments,  for  a  given  number  of  measures.  They  learn  to  express 
in  words,  as  well  as  in  movement,  the  number  of  pulses  in  two-, 
three-,  and  four-pulse  measures.  It  is  at  this  stage  that  the  children 
are  taught  how  to  beat  time. 


APPENDIX. 


Form. 


The  children  can  already  detect  when  a  tune  is  repeated ;  they 
listen  to  a  simple  piece  in  Binary  Form  and  discover  two  parts. 
They  suggest  ways  of  shewing  these ;  for  example,  by 
dancing  in  a  ring  for  the  first  part,  and  reversing  or 
separating  from  one  another  for  the  second ;  or  again,  by  dancing 
individually,  then  sitting  down,  taking  partners,  twirling  round,  etc.,  etc. 
Many  suggestions  will  be  made  by  the  children  and  each  can  be 
tried  in  turn.  All  will  be  useful,  because  each  will  help  them  to 
express,  and  so  to  become  fully  conscious  of,  what  they  hear; 
besides,  this  activity  will  give  the  children  a  purpose  for  listening, 
and  the  fact  that  they  are  encouraged  to  suggest  will  make  them  keen 
and  full  of  interest.  In  the  manner  indicated  above,  many  other 
examples  of  Unary,  Binary,  and  Ternary  Form  may  be  introduced, 
the  children  originating  actions  to  suit.  The  following  pieces  are 
suitable  for  this  purpose,  to  which  the  teacher  may  add  many  others : — 


Unary. 


Binary. 


Ternary. 


"Oh!   dear,  what   can  the  matter  be?"   (March  and 

Dance  Album)  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...SOMERVELL. 

"  Lavender's  Blue  "  (Dulce  Domum)      FARMER. 

"  Dickory,  dickory,  dock  "  (British  Nursery  Ehymes)  ...  MOFFAT  &  KIDSON. 

"  There's  nae  luck  "  (March  and  Dance  Album)  ...  SOMERVELL. 

"The  Keel  Eow"  „  „  , 

"  King  Arthur"  (Baby's  Opera;  Old  Air)          WARNS. 

"  Come,  lasses  and  lads  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)  HADOW. 

"  Charlie  is  my  Darling  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)  HADOW. 
"  Wi'  a  hundred  pipers  "  (March  and  Dance  Album)  ...  SOMERVELL. 
"  Buy  a  broom  "  (Dulce  Domum)  ...         ...         ...  FARMER. 

"  Song  of  the  Western  Men  "  (Songs  of  the  British 

Islands)  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  HADOW. 

"  Dear  Harp  of  my  Country  "  (Songs  of   the  British 

Islands)  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         


Phrases. 


In  order  to  help  the  children  to  become  conscious  of  the  division 
of  the  music  into  phrases,  it  is  suggested  that  they  should  dance  a 
certain  piece  with  more  variety  of  movement  than  they 
have  been  accustomed  to  give  it.  Here  it  may  be 
helpful  for  the  children  to  choose  partners  and  to  dance  sometimes 
together  and  sometimes  alone.  They  listen  for  the  music  to  tell 
them  when  to  change  and  originate  another  movement.  At  this 
stage  they  are  so  accustomed  to  attend  to  the  music  that  they  easily 
discover  the  phrases  and  find  a  change  of  rhythmic  expression  to 
mark  each  new  phrase  as  it  occurs. 


xli  APPENDIX. 

In  close  connexion  with  this  comes  the  realization  and  the 
expression  of  Cadences.  These  can  be  made  very  interesting  if 
simple  examples  are  taken.  The  children  experiment 
by  endeavouring  to  continue  talking  without  taking 
breath,  and  at  once  find  the  need  for  pauses  ;  they  also  listen  to 
reading  where  stops  are  neglected.  They  are  then  told  that  music 
nas  breathing-places  too.  They  listen  while  a  tune  with  which  they 
are  familiar  is  played  without  its  phrasing — they  hear  it  again, 
listening  for  the  breathing-places.  They  dance,  and  shew  these 
breathing-places  as  they  think  best — they  may  twist,  kneel,  bend, 
clap,  etc.,  and  if  entire  freedom  is  allowed,  the  children  usually  choose 
actions  which  fit  the  music.  A  graceful  bend  suits  one  Cadence 
and  a  sharp  clap  another.  As  soon  as  musical  expression  becomes 
stereotyped,  a  great  deal  of  its  value  is  lost.  At  this  stage,  the 
children  only  recognize  breathing-places ;  there  is  no  attempt  as  yet 
to  formulate  the  difference  between  one  kind  of  Cadence  and  another. 
A  Perfect  Cadence,  however,  makes  naturally  a  more  marked 
impression  upon  the  children's  minds. 

STAGE  IV. — Children  about  7  to  8  years. 

Again  the  children's  experiences   are   widened,  their  music  is 

more   varied  and   complex,   and  demands   greater  attention.      The 

children  are  never  asked  in  so  many  words  what  effect 

Cn8.P8.Ct6P 

a  composition  has  upon  them,  as  this  would  tend  to 
centre  their  thoughts  upon  themselves  rather  than  upon  the  music, 
and  would  result  in  artificiality  and  self-consciousness ;  but  in  order 
to  help  them  to  formulate  their  ideas  as  to  the  character  of  the  music 
itself,  three  methods  are  followed  :— 

(1)  The  children  often  choose  the  kind  of  music  for  their 

dancing,  for  example,  sad,  slow,  gay,  bright,  quick, 
weird,  etc. 

(2)  They  are  encouraged  to  tell  stories  and  make  pictures 

suggested  to  them  by  the  music ;  such  pieces,  for 
example,  as  the  following  usually  being  effective  in  this 
connexion  :— 

"  Hall  of  the  Mountain  King  '  (Peor  Gynt  Suite)      GRIEG. 

"  Knight  Eupert  "  (Album  for  the  Young)  ...     SCHUMANN. 

"  Pastoral  Dance  "  (Nell  Gwyn  Suite)      GERMAN. 

(3)  At  other  times  the  children's  power  to  read  meaning 

into  music  is  increased  by  a  background  of  environment 


APPENDIX.  xiii 

and  story  supplied  by  the  teacher.  This  was  done  very 
successfully,  in  the  writer's  own  experience,  in  the  case  of 
the  "Paupukeewis  Dance"  from  Coleridge  Taylor's  "Song 
of  Hiawatha."  Before  this  music  was  introduced,  the 
children  were  well  acquainted  with  the  environment  of  the 
North  American  Indians,  the  main  thread  of  the  story, 
and  the  most  important  characters  in  Longfellow's  poem. 
They  knew  well  the  first  stanza  describing  the  dance  : — 

"  First  he  danced  a  solemn  measure, 
Very  slow  in  step  and  gesture. 
In  and  out  among  the  pine  trees, 
Through  the  shadows  and  the  sunshine, 
Treading  softly  like  the  panther ; 
Then  more  swiftly  and  still  swifter, 
Whirling,  spinning  round  in  circles, 
Leaping  o'er  the  guests  assembled, 
Eddying  round  and  round  the  wigwam, 
Till  the  leaves  went  whirling  with  him, 
Till  the  dust  and  wind  together 
Swept  in  eddies  round  about  him." 

To  the  children  the  music  expressed  the  same  ideas  in 
a  wilder  and  more  wonderful  way.  The  Overture  to 
the  "  Midsummer  Night's  Dream  "  (Mendelssohn)  was 
treated  in  a  similar  manner.  The  story  of  Shakespeare's 
fairy  scene  had  been  told  several  times,  and  had  been 
freely  dramatized  by  the  children,  so  that  when  the 
music  was  introduced  it  was  enthusiastically  received, 
and  its  purport  thoroughly  realized. 

In  the  second  of  the  above  methods,  therefore,  the  children  hear 
the  music  and  it  suggests  ideas,  in  the  third  method  they  listen  for 
the  music's  interpretation  of  the  ideas  which  have  already  been 
suggested  to  them. 

Other  examples  of  suitable  music  for  this  stage  are  :— 

[The  Wind        ] 
Three  Melodies  \  The  Wave        \ HELLER. 

[The  Mermaid  J 
Hebrides  Overtiire      ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...     MENDELSSOHN. 

Waltz  (Lyrische  Stiickchen.     Book  I)         GRIEG. 

Elfentanz 

Watchman's  Song  ,,  „  „ 

Preludes.     Nos.  1,  7,  15  and  20       ..          CHOPIN. 

Minuet  in  F  (No.  6  of  Sept  Pieces),  Peters'  edition,  No.  4c         ...     HANDEL. 
f  Anitra's  Dance  "j 

Peer  Gynt  Suite  \  Death  of  Asa  ^ GRIEG. 

[Hall  of  the  Mountain  King  J 

These  last  three  pieces  may  be  taken  successively  as  striking 
contrasts. 


XIV 


APPENDIX. 


If  desired,  the  children  can  now  advance  to  the  study  of  the 
difference  between  simple  and  compound  times,  but  it 
is  usually  wiser  to  leave  this  till  a  later  stage,  giving 
more  experience  on  the  lines  already  begun. 


At  this  stage  recapitulation  of  the  work  already  done  should  be 
made,  more  difficult  examples,  such  as  the  following, 
being  given : — 

(Songs  of  the  British  Islands) 


Form. 

Binary  Form. 


The  Oak  and  the  Ash  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)  HADOW. 
"  Early  one  morning "                   „                     „             ...  „ 

"  Let  Erin  remember  „  „  ...  „ 

"  Carman's  Whistle "  „  „  ...  ,, 

"  Barbara  Allen "  „  „  ...  „ 

"  Bailiff's  Daughter "  „  „  ...  „ 

"  Norwegian  National  Song "        ...         ...         ...         ...  GRIEG. 

Minuet  in  F  (given  above,  page  xiii)        HANDEL. 

"  May  Fair  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)      HADOW. 

***  This  last  example  is  a  useful  one  by  means  of  which  to  introduce 

the  idea  of  a  Coda. 

Ternary  Form.   "  The  Last  Eose  of  Summer "  (Songs  of  the  British 

Islands)  HADOW. 

"  British  Grenadiers"  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)   ...  ,, 

"Miller  of    Dee"    (The   Jolly   Miller)    (Songs   of    the 

British  Islands)          „ 

"  Blue  Bells  of  Scotland  "  (Songs  of  the  British  Islands)  ,, 

"  The  Minstrel  Boy "  „  ,,         ...  „ 

"  My  Lady's  Garland "  (Minuet)      „  ,,         ...  ,, 

"Merch  Megan  „  „         ...  „ 

"  Sicilianisch  "         (Album  for  the  Young)         SCHUMANN 

••  The  Wild  Rider "        „  „ 

41  Eustic  Song "  „  „  ,, 

"  Morris  Dance  "  (Henry  VIII  Dances)  GERMAN. 

"  By  the  Spring  "  "j 

•"  Turkish  March "  ..  GURLITT. 

"  Buds  and  Blossoms  "        J 

Waltz  (Lyrische  Stiickchen,  Book  I)      GRIEG. 

"Humoresque"      DVORAK. 


The  children  now  listen  more  critically  to  the  breathing-places  in 
the  music ;  they  notice  that  some  are  longer  than  others.  Reference 

is  then  made  to  full-stops  and  commas  in  reading. 
Cadences*  Simple  tunes  with  well-marked  cadences  are  played  to 

the  children,  and  they  note  (1)  the  number,  (2)  the 
kind  of  stops.  They  then  suggest  methods  of  shewing  these ;  for 


APPENDIX.  xv 

example,  if  a  full  stop  is  represented  by  a  complete  turn,  a  comma 
may  be  shewn  by  a  half  turn ;  if  by  kneeling,  the  comma  may  be 
represented  by  a  bend.  Loud  and  soft  claps  may  be  used  in  this 
connexion  to  express  these  differences  in  the  punctuation  of  the 
music. 

The  terms  "phrases"  and  "whole-"  and  "half-cadences"  are 
then  introduced.  The  children  already  know  how  to  express  the 
idea  of  the  phrase  and  the  cadence  by  movement ;  they  should  now 
be  able  to  combine  their  movements  to  illustrate  both. 


The  results  here  described  have  been  brought  about  largely  by 
the  opportunities  given  to  the  children  of  expressing  their  thoughts 
and  feelings  freely  in  movement.  The  advantages  gained  are  : — 

(1)  That  the   children,   through   projecting   themselves   in 

thought  into  the  music,  and  formulating  in  movement 
the  ideas  thus  gained,  come  into  more  sympathetic 
relation  with  it. 

(2)  That    interest    and   pleasure  in  music  is   heightened, 

because  when  the  children  are  allowed  to  interpret  it 
in  this  dynamic  way,  they  are  more  inspired  than  if 
they  were  merely  passive  listeners  to  the  teacher's 
interpretation  or  directions. 

(3)  That  a  more   complete    understanding   and   a  deeper 

knowledge  of  music  are  attained  than  would  be  possible 
where  muscular  activity  and  motor  images  are  not  called 
into  play. 
The  most  encouraging  part  of  any  experiments  upon  these  lines 

is  the  children's  increased  interest  in  music  itself,  and  their  growing 

power  of  understanding  and  appreciating  it. 

This   is   the   one   great  aim ;    and   the   expression   of    musical 

experiences  by  movement,  and,  later,  the  more  analytic  study  of  the 

musical  fabric  are,  and  must  always  be,  considered   as   means   to 

this  end — never  as  ends  in  themselves. 


AURAL    CULTURE 

BASED    UPON    MUSICAL   APPRECIATION. 


BY 


STEWART  MACPHERSON  AND  ERNEST  READ. 


SYNOPSIS    OF    PARTS    II    AND    III. 

PART  II — The  series  of  major  keys — Compound  Time — The  simpler 
Modulations — Sight-singing  and  Dictation  tests  in  one 
and  two  parts — The  study  of  Intervals  from  both  a 
melodic  and  harmonic  point  of  view — Triads — Phrasing 
—Irregular  Rhythms — Construction  of  Melodies— 
Study  of  Character,  form  and  style  as  exemplified  in 
compositions  by  well-known  writers. 


PART  III — The  Minor  Key  regarded  from  a  harmonic  standpoint 
—The  Chromatic  Scale — More  advanced  Modulation— 
Sight-singing  and  Dictation  tests,  harmonic  and  contra- 
puntal— Advanced  Rhythmic  studies — Construction  of 
Melodies — An  introduction  to  the  aural  study  of 
Harmony — Further  "Appreciative"  study  of  the  works 
of  the  greater  masters — Some  characteristics  of  the 
music  of  various  periods. 


MUSICAL    APPRECIATION     IN     THE     SCHOOLS. 

MUSIC  IN  THE  NURSERY  SCHOOL.    By  Lilian  Bueke. 

This  delightful  little  book  meets  a  long-felt  want  in  Infant  and  Nursery  Schools.  It  introduces  music  to  the 
little  toddler  in  an  attractive  play-way;  Songs,  Singing  Games,  Listening  Games,  The  Toy  Band  and  many  other 
interesting  features  are  included.  Musical  examples  are  given  to  illustrate  each  step.  This  book  is  invaluable 
to  parents  as  well  as  teachers.  Stiff  paper  covers  (illustrated),  3s.  6d.  net. 


MUSIC  IN  THE  KINDERGARTEN  AND  LOWER  FORMS.    By  Lilian  Bueke. 

This  important  work,  the  result  of  the  authoress's  experience  in  (i)  teaching  children  of  the  kindergarten  age, 
and  (2)  the  training  of  teachers,  deals  with  the  first  stages  in  the  task  of  awakening  the  young  child's 
sensibility  to  musical  impression.  It  is  intended  to  precede  Part  I  of  "  Aural  Culture  based  upon  Musical 
Appreciation  "  (Stewart  Macpherson  and  Ernest  Read),  to  which  it  is  related  in  principle,  and  to  which  it  leads 
in  natural  sequence.  Stiff  paper  covers  (illustrated),  5s.  net  (2nd  imprint). 

THE  SONGS  OF  THE  CHILDREN. 

A  Collection  of  VERY  EASY  Nursery  Songs  with  the  traditional  tunes.     Harmonised  by  Lilian  Bueke. 

British  Islands.    Set  I  (Very  Easy).    2s.  6d.  net. 

This  edition  of  the  Nursery  Songs  is  especially  designed  for  use  in  Aural  Training  and  Musical  Appreciation 
classes,  and  is  intended  for  use  in  conjunction  with  "  Music  in  the  Kindergarten  and  Lower  Forms." 

SONGS  FROM  A  FRENCH  NURSERY.    Adapted  and  Harmonised  by  Edith  Rowland. 

Of  the  nine  tunes  contained  in  this  book,  the  first  seven  come  from  Brittany,  the  remaining  two  are 
French-Canadian.  (Moderately  easy.)  2s.net. 


Bonjour,  Tante  Perrine. 

2.  Les  Cloches. 

3.  A  la  Claire  Fontaine. 


4.  Le  Panier  Rond. 

5.  N'as-tu  pas  vu  mon  Gas  ? 

6.  Les  Poulettes. 


Suzon. 

Une  Perclriole. 

Noel. 


NET 

AURAL  CULTURE  based  upon  Musical  Appreciation.    By  Stewart  Maepherson  and       s.   d. 

Ernest  Read.     In  Three  Parts Parti         5     0 

Introduces  the  Pupil  to  the  basic  facts  of  Time,  Pitch  and  Rhythm,  practice  in  Sight-Singing  and  Musical  Dictation, 
forming  an  integial  part  of  the  course  of  instruction.  It  also  contains  a  valuable  Appendix,  dealing  with  Rhythmic 
movements  for  young  children,  etc. 

Ditto         Partll         7     0 

Introduces  the  Pupil  to  more  advanced  aspects  of  Time,  Rhythm  and  Pitch.  The  subject  of  Modulation— with 
Sight-Singing  and  Dictation  Tests  thereon — is  brought  to  his  notice,  and  the  cycle  of  major  keys  exemplified  in 
actual  living  music,  etc. 

Ditto         Part  III        7    0 

As  in  Parts  I  and  II  the  pupil  is  introduced  to  the  facts  of  Time  and  Pitch  through  music  itself.  The  question  of  the 
Minor  Key  is  dealt  with  from  the  harmonic  stand-point,  having  for  its  object  the  development  of  the  sense  of  Tonality 
and  Key.  The  teaching  of  the  aural  perception  of  Intervals  and  Rhythm  proceeds  along  modern  and  novel  lines. 
The  development  of  the  aesthetic  sense  takes  the  form  of  a  series  of  graduated  Appreciation  lessons,  dealing  with  style, 
personality  and  period  in  musical  art. 

Rhythmic  Exercises  &  Songs  (Pupil's  Books).    Part  I,  I/- net;  Part  II,  1/6  net;  Part  III,  2/-net. 
Aural  Training  Series:— 

No.  i.   FIRST    STEPS    IN    MELODY    MAKING,     including    some    Songs    and    Sight-Singing 

Exercises,  etc.    By  Ernest  Read 1    6 

No.  2.  STUDIES  IN  SIGHT-SINGING.    By  Ernest  Read          2    0 

EASY  AND  MELODIOUS   SIGHT-SINGING   EXERCISES.     In  Sol-fa  and  Staff  Notation  (for 

use  with  "Aural  Culture").     By  Edith  Rowland       1     6 


NURSERY  RHYME  PIECES. 
Nursery   Rhyme   Pieces.     A  set   of  easy  piano   solos   for   elementary   pupils,  applying   the    principles   of 

Aural  Training.     Illustrated  by  "  Mac."     Composed  by  Ernest  Read.     Price  2s.  6d. 
Rhymes   and    Rhythms.      15   easy   piano   duets,  applying   the   principles   of  Aural   Training.     Illustrated 

by  Hugh  Chesterman.     Composed  by  Ernest  Read.     Price  3s. 

THE  MUSICAL  EDUCATION  OF  THE  CHILD.     By  Stewart  Maepherson. 

In  view  of  the  significant  report  of  the  committee  appointed  by  the  Board  of  Education  to  consider  the 
Differentiation  of  Curricula  in  Boys'  and  Girls'  Schools,  in  which  the  great  importance  of  music  in  education 
is  strongly  insisted  upon,  the  question  of  the  lines  upon  which  such  musical  work  should  be  carried  out  becomes 
one  of  considerable  urgency  for  all  heads  of  schools,  teachers  and  parents. 

In  his  little  books  of  essays  Mr.  Stewart  Macpherson  speaks  of  the  true  function  of  music  in  school  life,  and 
outlines  a  practical  scheme  of  work  which  in  its  main  features  is  the  outcome  of  conclusions  virtually  identical 
with  those  arrived  at  by  the  signatories  to  the  report  referred  to  above. 

Stiff  paper  covers,  3s.  6d.  net. 

THE  CHILD'S  TRAINING  IN  RHYTHM.    By  Sylvia  E.  Currey. 

In  putting  forward  this  little  book  dealing  with  the  teaching  of  Rhythm,  the  Authoress  has  had  especially  in 
mind  the  difficulties  encountered  by  teachers  who  are  responsible  for  the  musical  training  of  young  children,  and 
she  hopes  that  to  such  the  book  may  be  of  some  service. 

On  account  of  the  strong  appeal  which  is  made,  in  the  case  of  young  children,  by  Nursery  Rhyme  Tunes  and 
National  Melodies,  the  use  of  these  is  indispensable  in  the  early  stages  of  musical  training;  it  has,  therefore, 
seemed  advisable  to  draw  largely  upon  these  in  the  musical  illustrations. 

Stiff  paper  covers,  2s.  6d.  net. 


B  226 


London:  Joseph  Williams,  Limited,  32  Great  Portland  Street,  W.I. 


SCHOOL    SONGS    IN    UNISON 


No. 


SERIES  1. 

TITLE. 


to  15 Various. 


Price  3d.  each  number. 

COMPOSED  BY      COMPASS. 


to  E 
to  F 


16  The  clown's  song   J.  L.  Hatton    . .     C 

17  One  by  one G.  A.  Macfarren     C     to  E 

~     toF 


D 


to  F 
to  E 


18  Little  Billee  ..............  F.  Pascal  .... 

19  Vogelweid  theMinnesinger.J.  L.  Hatton   ..     D     to  E 

20  The  ugly  duckling     ......  Marcia  Tyndale     C  J  to  D 

21  There  was  a  jolly  miller  ..Old  English  ----     D     to  D 

22  A  wet  sheet  and  a  flowing  sea.  L.  Elliott  ....     D     to  E 

23  Moya  Town     ............  L.  Elliott  ......  C  to  E  (or  C) 

24  Looking  forward    ........  F.  Pascal  ......  D  to  Eb  (orG) 

25  Old  friends    .............  E.  I.  Loder  ----     D     to  E 

26  The  cricketer  ............  F.  Pascal  ......  Bb  (orC)  to  F 

27  Tom  Tiddler's  ground  ----  Wakeling  Dry  .  . 

28  Britannia  ................  L.  Elliott  ...... 

29  TruthfulTom  ............  F.Pascal..  ---- 

30  I  am  a  brisk  and  sprightly  lad.  Old  English  .. 

31  Cycling  song    ............  L.Elliott  ...... 

32  The  golfer    ..............  F.Pascal  ...... 

33  Football  Song  ............  F.  Pascal  ......     Cf  to  E 

(c)34  The  oak  and  the  Union  Jack.  F.  Pascal    ....     Kb  to  F 

35  Making  the  best  of  it    .  .  .  .Carl  Gressler  ..     C     to  D 

36  Rumpty  Tumpty     ........  E.  Solomon  ....     Bb  to  D 

37  The  snowdrop  ............  F'.  Pascal  ......     Cto  D(orF) 

(c)  38  Indian  lullaby  ............  Carl  Gressler   .. 

39  My  darling  ..............  Marcia  Tyndale 

40  Old  John  and  Joan    ......  F.  Pascal  ...... 

41  The  oyster  lad     ..........  J.  Greenhill  ---- 

42  The  song  of  home  ........  J.  Reading  .... 

43  Who  killed  Cock  Robin?.  .  R.  L.de  Pearsall 

44  That  telleth  of  joy  ........  A.  R.M.Dobson 

45  Hawke  ..................  Dr.  C.  H   Lloyd 

46  The  fighting  Temeraire    .  .  F.  Pascal  ...... 

47  Rain-  drops  patter  ........  A.Scott  Gatty.  . 

48  Child's  good-night  ........  A.Scott  Gatty.  . 

49  Clifton  song  ..............  C.  W.  Maudsley 

50  Hear  what  the  sea-wind  saitli.F.  Pascal  .... 

(c)  Staff  and  Tonic  Sol-fa  combined. 
Separate  Tonic  Sol-fa  editions  to  nos.  1-13,  id.  each. 

SERIES  II. 

Pyice  3d.  each  number  (except  nos.  16  and  25,  4d.  each). 
i   What  a  hero  you  must  be  ....  F.  Pascal  ........     A     to  D 


to  F 
to  Eb 


to  Eb 
to  E 
to  E 
to  D 
to  Kb 
to  E 
to  K 
to  Kb 
to  K 
to  D 
to  E 
to  D 


D     toF 


4  The  roaring  forties  Old  English Bb  to  I) 

5  The  three  old  men  of  Gotham. .  .Old  air   C 

6  The  Arethusa     William  Shield     G(orB)tokb 

7  The  bold  Menelaus Alan  Gray  A  (or  D)to  K  (or  F) 

8  Playing  fields F.  Pascal   . 

9  Eyes  in  the  boat    F.  Pascal  C 

(A  song  of  the  winning  crew) 

10  Only  dreaming F.  Pascal    

(c)  1 1  A  goodnight  song Kllen  Goodspeed 

(c)  12  Holland   Kllen  Goodspeed 

(c)  13   Miss  Poppy    Kllen  Goodspeed 

14  Of  the  moon    Kllen  Goodspeed 

1 5  Be  prepared    F.  Kiicken 

16  The  battle  of  the  Baltic  . .  H.OrsmondAnderton 

(With  ami  Voice  Part  ad  lit.} 

17  Thechaseof  life  (hunting  song)  V..  Markham  Lee 

18  On  the  lake  of  dreams F.  Pascal   

19  The  shepherd F.  Pascal   

20  May  morn    F.  Pascal   

21  Fairy  swing  song F.  Pascal   

32  Glad  music F.  Pascal  

23  The  gipsie's  call    H.  G.  Ley 

24  The  walrus  and  the  carpenter.  .A.  Scott  Gatty.. 

25  On  Surrey  hills Crton  Bradley  . . 

26  Cricket   Arr.byJ.  Farmer 

27  To  meet  again   Mendelssohn     . . 

28  John  Peel   Arr.  by  J.  B.  W. 

29  Widdicombe  Fair Folk  song 

30  Here's  a  health  unto  His  Majesty  C 

31  Carrion  crow.  (Sep.  T.S.  zd.)  Old  English  .... 

32  Old  King  Cole Old  melody 

(c)  Staff  and  Tonic  Sol-fa  combined. 

SERIES    III. 
Price  3d.  each  number  (exceptions,  i,  4,  18,  19,  240x^28, 

1  MenofHarlech   arr.  Cyril  Jenkins 

2  All  thro'  the  night    arr.  Cyril  Jenkins 

3  David  of  the  White  Rock arr.  Cyril  Jenkins 

4  The  Ash  Grove    arr.  Cyril  Jenkins 

5  When  I'm  big Cyril  Jenkins. .  . . 

6  Little  Boy  Blue   Cyril  Jenkins 

7  The  mulberry  bush Cyril  Jenkins .... 

8  The  man  in  the  moon     Cyril  Jenkins. .  . . 

9  Doggie   Granville  Bantock 

10  Day  and  night Cecil  Sharman    . . 

1 1  Putting  the  world  to  bed Cecil  Sharman    . . 

12  The  shepherd   Cecil  Sharman   .. 

1 3  The  lamb Cecil  Sharman    . . 

14  The  birds Peter  Warlock    . . 

15  Billy  and  me Laurence  Powell 

16  The  beggar  maid Laurence  Powell 

17  When  daffodils  begin  to  peer. .  Hubert  Hales. .  . . 


C     to  E> 

1  (or  III  to  Kb 

))  to  K  (or  F) 

Kb 

o  F 

C 

oE 

D 

oE 

C 

oD 

C 

oE 

I) 

oE 

K 

oE 

I) 

oFf 

B 

o  K 

C 

oK 

D 

o  E 

D 

oE 

I) 

oE 

D 

oK 

C 

oEb 

B 

o  Ff 

Cf 

oEb 

D 

o  Eb 

E 

oE 

E 

oE 

Cf 

oD 

D 

oD 

c 

oD 

Ob 

oD 

D 

oD 

28,  4.1 

each). 

D 

oE 

D 

oE 

B 

oE 

C 

oD 

D 

oD 

E 

o  F 

C 

oD 

E 

oF 

•  E 

oF 

D 

oE 

C 

oE 

E 

oE 

E 

oE 

F 

oG 

Db 

oF 

C 

o  F 

D 

oE 

Both  Notations  combined. 

*•  SERIES  Ill-continued 
No.  TITLE.  COMPOSED  BY     COMPASS. 

logon Hubert  Hales G    to  E 

Lawn  as  white  as  driven  snow    Hubert  Hales. ...    F     to  Eb 
Get  you  hence    Hubert  Hales. ...    F    to  E 

19  \Will  you  buy  any  tape? Hubert  Hales. ...    D    to  Eb 

20  The  little  Celandine  E.  L.  Baintcn . . . .    D    to  G 

21  The  march  past   Cecil  Sharman    . .    D    to  E 

22  The  shrimp  Cecil  Sharman    . .    E  b  to  Eb 

23  All  creatures  of  our  God  and  King.  J.  A.  Tatam   ..  E     to  G 

24  The  standing  toast  (with  chorus)W.  E.  Smith  C    to  E 

25  The  nightingale F.  A.  Ogilvy  ....  C  to  Y(or  G 

26  A  Spring  carol    Hubert  Hales ....    F    to  F 

27  For  all  the  Saints  (in  F  or  G).  .Granville  Bantock  C    to  F 
38  Christmas  Song W.  E.  Smith Ff  to  G 

29  "Ay" Hubert  Hales F    to  F 

30  Minnie  and  Winnie Hubert  Hales. ...   F    to  F 

Nos.  1-4  with  Welsh  and  English  text. 


**  SERIES    IV.     Price  3d.  each  number. 
Selected  and  Edited  by  ERNEST  READ,   F.R.A.M. 


London  Townt Barbara  Frost    ..  C     to  E 

3  Miss  Poppyt Ellen  Goodspeed.  D     to  E 

4  A  good-night  songt Ellen  Goodspeed.  C     to  D 

5  Fairyland} Granville  Bantock  D     to  F 

6  Blackberrying  song}    Alec  Rowley   ....  C 

7  Very  lovely} Lilian  Smith   ....  C 

8  Holland  }    Ellen  Goodspeed.  C 

9  Hunting  the  wren} Adam  Carse    ....  D 

10  Sometime  Tim}     Stanley  Marchant  D 

11  Girls  and  boyst Barbara  Frost 


to  F 
to  E 
to  Kb 
to  B 
toD 
toF 
toF 
to  F} 
to  E 
toD 
to  E 
to  D 
18  A  rhyme  of  time} Felix  White  Cf  to  K 


13  The  happy  tree}   ............  Cynthia  C.  Cox  .  .     C 

13  Fairies  and  chimneys}    ......  Lilian  Smith    ....     C 


14  The  canoe}    ................  Alec  Rowley 

1  5  John  Cook's  mare}   ..........  Adam  Carse    ....     K 

16  The  new  moon*     ............  Felix  White    ....     D 

17  The  Broomsijuire's  son}  ......  Adam  Carse 


19  When  the  cows  come  home} . .  Ernest  Bullock  . .     D     to  E 

20  All  the  bells  were  ringing} ....  Ernest  Bullock   . .     D     to  E 

21  Mistletoe* Jessie  Furze    ....     C      to  Ff 

22  Hide  and  seek* Jessie  Furze    ....     D     to  E 

23  Shellover} Jessie  Furze    ....     C     to  E 

24  Fairy  lullabyt   Percy  Judd D    to  D 

95  A  wet  sheet  and  a  flowing  sea}  C.  Palmer BtoE(orG) 

D  toF 
D  to  E 
D  to  D 
C  toE 
D  toG 
Eb  to  F 
C  toE 
D  to  F| 
D  toE 
C  toE 
Bb  to  E 
D  toG 
D  to  F* 
Eb  to  Eb 
D  to  F 
D  to  Ff 


26  If  J Barbara  Frost . 

27  She  is  a  winsome  wee  thing}.  .Allan  Biggs 

28  Eastern  air  }   Allan  Biggs 

29  The  owl  }     Cecil  Sharman   . . 

30  St.  Leonard's  Forest  * Harry  Farjeon  . . 

/  a  Ewes  }     Harry  Farjeon   . . 

31  I  o  Arundel  {    Harry  Farjeon   . . 

32  Mr.  Macanally  {    Cecil  Sharman    . . 

33  The  balloon  lady  }    Cecil  Sharman   . . 

34  Daisies} Jessie  Furze    .... 

35  The  rock-a-bye  lady  * Jessie  Furze    .... 

36  I  had  a  dove  ("  Song  ")  *     ....  Jessie  Furze    

37  O  brother  man  }     Norman  Demuth 

38  O  my  dear  heart  } Norman  Demuth 

39  Soldiers  three  * Norman  Demuth 

40  Will  you  buy  any  tape?  *   ....  Norman  Demuth 

(a  Bread  and  cherries  t   Phyllis  Clegg D    to  F 

41  \  b  Three  jolly  gentlemen  t Phyllis  Clegg D    to  D 

{a  Spinning  song  t   H.  V.  Jervis  Read     C     to  C 
b  He  was  a  merman  t    H.  V.  Jervis-Read     C     to  F 

t  Very  easy.     }  Easy.     *  Moderately  easy.     4  Moderate. 

**  SERIES  V.     r rice  3d.  each  number. 
Arranged  by  GRANVILLE    BANTOCK. 

1  Flowers  o' the  Forest Jane  Elliot D  to  E 

2  Ye  banks  an'  braes Robert  Burns. ...     D  to  E 

3  Highland  laddie James  Hogg   ....     C  to  F 

4  The  Campbells  are  comin'.. .  .Traditional C  to  E 

5  My  ain  kind  dearie,  O Robert  Fergusson     C  to  F 

6  Annie  Laurie ^a^v  Jonn  Scott       C  to  E 

7  Bonnie  Dundee    Sir  Walter  Scott       C  to  F 

8  John  Highlandman Robert  Burns C  to  F. 

9  A  hundred  pipers Lady  Nairne  ....     C  to  F 

10  Auld  Lang  Syne  Robert  Burns D  to  E  (  or  G) 

1 1  Lock  the  door,  I  .ariston James  Hogg   ....      1  >     to  Ff 

12  TheMarchoftheCameron  Men.  Traditional    ....     D    to  Ff 

**  SERIES  VI.   Price  3d.  each  number. 
i  Evening    Eric  H.  Thiman      D    to  E 

**  EDUCATIONAL  SONGS. 

Selected,  and  with  Annotations  by  J.  MURRAY  MacBAIN. 

1  A  Thanksgiving  Hymn Eric  H.  Thiman     2d.  (Senr.) 

2  A  True  Story  Cecil  Sharman..     2d.  (Jnr.) 

faWilly,  Willy,  Will Folk  Song \,    ,v  K* 

3  1  <*The  Naughty  Duckling Hilda  Paul    ....  J2<1 

4  Little  Trotty  Wagtail Ivor  R.  Davies. .     3d.  (Senr.) 

(with  descant) 

5  Travelling Ivor  R.  Davies. .     id.  (Senr.) 

6  Little  Ladies  Long  Ago V.  Rastrelli  .  .id.  (V  K  &  Jnr.) 

7  Bird's  Roundelay  French  Song.  .2d.  (V  E  &  Jnr.) 


Bound  Volumes  of  Specimen  Part  Songs,  Unison  Songs,  Cantatas,  etc.,  will  he  sent  for  Inspection  to  bona-flde 
teachers.     To  be  returned  wit  bin  14  days  with  order,  together  with  cost  of  postage. 


London:  Joseph  Williams,  Limited,  32  Great  Portland  Street,  W.I. 


PERCUSSION    BAND    MUSIC 

FOR    CHILDREN    OF    ALL    AGES 


The  object  of  the  Toy  Band  is  to  enable  small  children  to  take  part  in  the  performance  of  simple 
instrumental  music,  instead  of  merely  listening  to  it. 

For  castanets,  triangles,  tambourines, 


RHYTHMIC   BAND,  SERIES   1.     Arr.  by  ERNEST  READ. 

cymbals,  drums,  piano-conductor  and  child-conductor's  score. 

NET  CASH 
s.    d. 

1  Schumann.     Soldiers'  March        . .         . .        complete     i     o 

2  Bach.     Minuet  in  G..         ..         ..         ..  „  i    o 

3  Handel.     Bourree  in  G       ..         ..         ..  ,,  i     6 

4  Schubert.     Ballet  Music  in  G      ..         ..  ,,  i     6 

5  Mendelssohn.     Children's  Pieces  No.  i  „  i     6 

6  Purcell.     Minuet  and  Trumpet  Tune     ..  ,,  i     6 


7  Beethoven.     Minuet  in  G 

8  Mendelssohn.     Venetian  Gondola  Song 

9  Mozart.     Minuet  in  F 

10  Tschaikowsky.     Russian  Dance,  from  Op.  40 

'  }  In  the  press. 


NET  CASH 
d. 
6 
6 
6 


complete 


For  Nos.  i  to  g  additional  separate  parts  may  be  had  at  ad.  net  each  and  separate  child-conductor's  score  at  6d.  net  each. 

Extra  violin  and  'cello  parts  to  No.  3  at  3d.  net  each. 

Additional  separate  parts  to  No.  10  may  be  had  at  3d.  net  each  and  extra  child-conductor's  scores  at  od.  net  each. 

NET  PRICES. 

Child 
Complete      conductor's 


RHYTHMIC    BAND,  SERIES  2.      Selected  by  ERNEST  READ. 

1  Yvonne  A.dair.     The  elf,  the  giant  and  the  gnome  

For  triangles,  tambourines,  drums  and  piano. 

2  Yvonne  Adair.     A  little  concerto 

For  triangles,  tambourines,  cymbals,  drums,  piano  and  voices. 
L.  Van  Beethoven.     Six  ecossaises. 

3         Nos.  I  &  II  1 

4  .         Nos.  Ill  &  IV  >     Arranged  Muriel  A.   Green 

5         Nos.  V  &  VI  J 

6  F.   Schubert     Valses  nobles,  op.  77.     Arranged  Muriel  A.  Green 

7  Edith  Rowland.     The  holiday  party,  Overture 

For  triangles,  tambourines,  cuckoo,  quail,  nightingale,  drums  and  piano  (duet). 

8  J.  S.  Bach.     Musette  (arranged  Ella  Fairall) 

9  J.  S.   Bach.     Polonaise  (Arranged  E.  M.  Collins)  

10  R.  Schumann.     Papillons  (Arranged  Ella  Fairall)          

11  E.M.Collins.     Come,  ye  young  men  (Old  Song)   .. 

12  E.  M.  Collins.     Gathering  Peascods  (Country  Dance) 


s.  d. 
i     6 


ffos.  3,  4,  5,  6,  8,  9,  10,  n,  12  are  for  castanets,  triangles,  tambourines,  cymbals,  drums  and  piano 


RHYTHMIC   BAND,    SERIES  3.     Selected  by  ERNEST  READ. 

1  O.  Petersen.     A  Scandinavian  Dance  (Arranged  M.  Evans) 

2  Madeleine  Evans.     A  Chinese  Festival 

3  E.  M.  Collins.     The  White  Cockade  (Old  Scottish  Air) 

4  E.  M.  Collins.     The  Hundred  Pipers  (Scotch  Air)  . .          . .  

5  E.  M.  Collins.     The  Ash  Grove  (Welsh  Melody) 

6  Schubert.     Moment  Musical  (Arranged  R.  Reichardt) 

Nos.  i  to  6  are  for  castanets,  triangles,  tambourines,  cymbals,  drums  and  piano. 

7  Bee'.hoven.     Turkish  March  (Arranged  Edith  Rowland)  

For  triangles,  tambourines  (and  bells),  cymbals  (and  gong),  side  drums  and  piano  (duet}. 


score 
s.  d. 


Extra 
parts 
each 
s.  d. 


RHYTHMIC    BAND,   SERIES  4.      Arranged  by  ERNEST  READ. 

For  castanets,  triangles,  tambourines,  cymbals,  drums,  piano-conductor  and 
child-conductor'' s  score,  with  elementary  optional  string  parts.  Complete 
set  of  strings  price  is.  net,  or  separately,  price  4d.  net  each. 

1  Schubert.     Marche  Militaire 

2  Handel.     March  from  "  Scipio  " 

3  Handel,     (a)  Gavotte  from  "  Otho  " 

(b)  March  from  "  Occasional  "  Oratorio. . 

4  Handel.     Minuet  from  "  Samson  " 


Extra  child-  Extra 

Complete     conductor's  per- 

percussion     score  with  cussion 

and  pfte.            pfte.  parts 

26                i     6  03 


(Early    Stages).         Selected    by 


PERCUSSION    BAND    SERIES. 
YVONNE  ADAIR. 

1  Ella  Fairall.     Under  the  Rose  (Old  English  Song)  

2  Ella  Fairall.     Conversation  at  the  Tea  Party          

3  Purcell.     Rigadon  (Arranged  Katharine  Benham)          

4  Purcell.     Air  in  D  minor  ,,  ,,  ,, 

5  Yvonne  Adair.     Tweedledum  and  Tweedledee 

Nos.  i,  2  and  $  are  for  triangles,  tambourines,  drums  and  piano. 

Nos.  3  and  5  are  for  triangles,  tambourines,  cymbals,  drums  and  piano. 


each 


Separate  child-    Extra 
conductor's        parts 
Complete         score 
i  o    6 

o    6 


A  SONG  OF  SPRING.  By  E.  EKLESS.  For  voice  (or  voices)  and  piano,  with  accompaniments 
for  toy  instruments.  Score,  is.  6d.  Violin,  6d.  Tambourine  and  drum,  3d.  Bells  and  birds,  3d. 
Cuckoo,  quail  and  triangle,  3d. 

DANSE  RUSTIQUE.  By  GEORGE  E.  MOTT.  For  piano,  harmonium  or  American  organ, 
strings  and  toy  instruments.  Score  or  piano,  is.  6d.  Harmonium,  4d.  Cuckooed.  Trumpets,  3d. 
String  parts,  3d.  each.  Nightingale,  3d.  Bells  and  triangle,  3d.  Drums  and  tambourines,  3d 

For  particulars  of  instruments  for  Percussion  Band  ask  for  List  9  F. 


B  12 


London :  Joseph  Williams,  Limited,  32  Great  Portland  Street,  W.I